290
Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI 1-1 ........................................................................ 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1 ................................................................................ 1.2 Description of GUI Components 1-1 ............................................................. 1.2.1 Overview of GUI Components 1-1 ....................................................... 1.2.2 Menu Bar 1-2 ....................................................................................... 1.2.3 Toolbar 1-3 ........................................................................................... 1.2.4 Navigation Tree 1-3 .............................................................................. 1.2.5 System Result Pane 1-4 ...................................................................... 1.2.6 Command Window 1-4 ......................................................................... 1.2.7 Shortcut Keys 1-6 ................................................................................. 1.2.8 GUI Applications on the BAM 1-6 ........................................................ 1.2.9 GUI Applications on the Client 1-7 ....................................................... 1.3 Starting GUI 1-8 ............................................................................................ 1.3.1 Starting MML Client 1-8 ....................................................................... 1.3.2 Starting Alarm Management System 1-9 ............................................. 1.3.3 Starting Performance Management System 1-10 .................................. Chapter 2 Using MML Client 2-1 ........................................................................... 2.1 Using System Menus 2-1 ............................................................................. 2.1.1 Logging In 2-1 ...................................................................................... 2.1.2 Re-logging In 2-1 .................................................................................. 2.1.3 Logging Out 2-2 ................................................................................... 2.1.4 Changing Password 2-2 ....................................................................... 2.1.5 Managing Office Information 2-3 .......................................................... 2.1.6 Setting Output Configurations 2-7 ........................................................ 2.1.7 Setting Command Timeout Duration 2-10 .............................................. 2.1.8 Saving Input Commands 2-10 ................................................................ 2.1.9 Executing Commands in Batch 2-11 ...................................................... 2.1.10 Stopping Executing Commands in Batch 2-18 ..................................... 2.1.11 Setting Printing Options 2-19 ............................................................... 2.1.12 Printing in Real Time 2-19 .................................................................... 2.1.13 Flushing Printer 2-19 ............................................................................ 2.1.14 Locking Client 2-20 .............................................................................. 2.1.15 Automatically Locking Client 2-20 ........................................................ 2.1.16 Exiting 2-21 .......................................................................................... 2.2 Using Service Menus 2-21 ............................................................................. 2.2.1 Starting Alarm Management System 2-21 ............................................. 2.2.2 Starting Performance Management System 2-22 .................................. 2.3 Using Authority Menus 2-22 ........................................................................... 2.3.1 Classification Operation Authorities 2-22 ...............................................

1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    1

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI 1-1........................................................................

1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1................................................................................1.2 Description of GUI Components 1-1.............................................................

1.2.1 Overview of GUI Components 1-1.......................................................1.2.2 Menu Bar 1-2.......................................................................................1.2.3 Toolbar 1-3...........................................................................................1.2.4 Navigation Tree 1-3..............................................................................1.2.5 System Result Pane 1-4......................................................................1.2.6 Command Window 1-4.........................................................................1.2.7 Shortcut Keys 1-6.................................................................................1.2.8 GUI Applications on the BAM 1-6........................................................1.2.9 GUI Applications on the Client 1-7.......................................................

1.3 Starting GUI 1-8............................................................................................1.3.1 Starting MML Client 1-8.......................................................................1.3.2 Starting Alarm Management System 1-9.............................................1.3.3 Starting Performance Management System 1-10..................................

Chapter 2 Using MML Client 2-1...........................................................................

2.1 Using System Menus 2-1.............................................................................2.1.1 Logging In 2-1......................................................................................2.1.2 Re-logging In 2-1..................................................................................2.1.3 Logging Out 2-2...................................................................................2.1.4 Changing Password 2-2.......................................................................2.1.5 Managing Office Information 2-3..........................................................2.1.6 Setting Output Configurations 2-7........................................................2.1.7 Setting Command Timeout Duration 2-10..............................................2.1.8 Saving Input Commands 2-10................................................................2.1.9 Executing Commands in Batch 2-11......................................................2.1.10 Stopping Executing Commands in Batch 2-18.....................................2.1.11 Setting Printing Options 2-19...............................................................2.1.12 Printing in Real Time 2-19....................................................................2.1.13 Flushing Printer 2-19............................................................................2.1.14 Locking Client 2-20..............................................................................2.1.15 Automatically Locking Client 2-20........................................................2.1.16 Exiting 2-21..........................................................................................

2.2 Using Service Menus 2-21.............................................................................2.2.1 Starting Alarm Management System 2-21.............................................2.2.2 Starting Performance Management System 2-22..................................

2.3 Using Authority Menus 2-22...........................................................................2.3.1 Classification Operation Authorities 2-22...............................................

Page 2: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

2.3.2 Adding Operator Account 2-23...............................................................2.3.3 Modifying Operator Account 2-24..........................................................2.3.4 Deleting Operator Account 2-26.............................................................2.3.5 Adding Workstation 2-26........................................................................2.3.6 Modifying Workstation 2-27....................................................................2.3.7 Deleting Workstation 2-28......................................................................2.3.8 Setting Command Group 2-29...............................................................

2.4 Using View Menus 2-30..................................................................................2.4.1 Overview of Using View Menus 2-30.....................................................2.4.2 Showing or Hiding Windows 2-30..........................................................2.4.3 Showing Tools and Status 2-31.............................................................

2.5 Using Window Menus 2-31.............................................................................2.5.1 Cascading Windows 2-31......................................................................2.5.2 Tiling Windows Horizontally 2-32...........................................................

2.6 Using Help Menus 2-33..................................................................................2.6.1 Using SoftX3000 Online Book 2-33.......................................................2.6.2 Using Help Topics 2-35..........................................................................2.6.3 Calling Online Help of Dialog Box 2-36..................................................2.6.4 Calling Pop-Up Online Help 2-36...........................................................2.6.5 Querying Version 2-37...........................................................................

2.7 Using Management Tab 2-38.........................................................................2.7.1 Overview of Management Tab 2-38.......................................................2.7.2 Browsing Device Panel 2-39..................................................................2.7.3 Displaying Board Information 2-41.........................................................2.7.4 Resetting Boards 2-42...........................................................................2.7.5 Swapping Boards 2-43...........................................................................2.7.6 Querying CPU Usage 2-43....................................................................2.7.7 Querying Memory Usage 2-44...............................................................2.7.8 Configuring Subscriber Data 2-45..........................................................2.7.9 Maintaining Subscriber Data 2-47..........................................................

2.8 Using MML Navigation Tree 2-47...................................................................2.8.1 Overview of Using MML Navigation Tree 2-47......................................2.8.2 Using Common Maintenance Pane 2-48...............................................2.8.3 Querying History Commands 2-49.........................................................2.8.4 Querying Online Help 2-51.....................................................................

2.9 Using Monitor Tab 2-51..................................................................................2.9.1 Overview of Using Monitor Tab 2-51......................................................2.9.2 Trace Management Tasks 2-52.............................................................2.9.3 Maintenance Management Tasks 2-53..................................................

2.10 Using the Toolbar 2-53.................................................................................

Page 3: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System 3-1...............................................

3.1 Overview of Alarm Management System 3-1...............................................3.2 Classification of Alarms 3-1..........................................................................

3.2.1 Classifying Alarms by Type 3-1............................................................3.2.2 Classifying Alarms by Level 3-2...........................................................

3.3 Generic Operations 3-3................................................................................3.3.1 Starting Alarm Management System 3-3.............................................3.3.2 Customizing Alarm Colors 3-4.............................................................

3.4 Browsing Alarms 3-5....................................................................................3.4.1 Browsing Fault Alarms 3-6...................................................................3.4.2 Browsing Event Alarms 3-7..................................................................3.4.3 Browsing History Alarms 3-8................................................................3.4.4 Defining Alarm Filter Settings 3-8........................................................3.4.5 Filtering Alarms of Malicious Calls and Emergency Calls 3-9..............

3.5 Querying Alarms 3-9.....................................................................................3.5.1 Notes on Querying Alarms 3-9.............................................................3.5.2 Operation Procedure 3-9......................................................................

3.6 Alarm Management Operations 3-10.............................................................3.6.1 Deleting History Alarms 3-10.................................................................3.6.2 Masking Alarms 3-11.............................................................................3.6.3 Querying Alarm Configurations 3-13......................................................3.6.4 Defining Alarm Box Control Settings 3-14..............................................3.6.5 Defining Alarm Statistics 3-14................................................................3.6.6 Defining Alarm Box Screen Level 3-16..................................................3.6.7 Querying Alarm Box Screen Level 3-17.................................................3.6.8 Defining Sound Durations for Fault Alarms 3-17....................................

3.7 Using Other Alarm Related Options 3-18.......................................................3.7.1 Overview of Other Alarm Related Options 3-18.....................................3.7.2 Using Shortcut Menu 3-18.....................................................................3.7.3 Querying Alarm Explanation Details 3-19..............................................3.7.4 Saving Alarm Content to File 3-20.........................................................3.7.5 Recovering an Alarm 3-20.....................................................................3.7.6 Acknowledging an Alarm 3-21...............................................................3.7.7 Clearing Recovery Alarms 3-21.............................................................

3.8 Defining Print Options 3-23............................................................................3.8.1 Overview of Using Print Options 3-23....................................................3.8.2 Defining Real Time Print Filter Settings 3-23.........................................3.8.3 Printing Alarm Details in Real Time 3-23...............................................3.8.4 Flushing the Printer 3-23........................................................................

Page 4: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System 4-1...................................

4.1 Overview of Performance Measurement 4-1................................................4.2 Generic Operations 4-1................................................................................

4.2.1 Workflow of Performance Measurement 4-1........................................4.2.2 Logging in to the Performance Management System 4-2....................

4.3 Cautions and Notes 4-4................................................................................4.3.1 Maximum Number of Tasks 4-4...........................................................4.3.2 User Authority 4-4................................................................................4.3.3 Measurement entities 4-5.....................................................................4.3.4 BAM time 4-5.......................................................................................

4.4 Creating a Performance Measurement Task 4-6.........................................4.4.1 General Workflow 4-6..........................................................................4.4.2 Customizing an Entity 4-7....................................................................4.4.3 Launching the Task Creation Interface 4-10..........................................4.4.4 Defining Task Attributes 4-11.................................................................4.4.5 Selecting a Measurement Unit 4-12.......................................................4.4.6 Selecting Measurement Entities 4-12....................................................4.4.7 Selecting a Measurement Object 4-15...................................................4.4.8 Setting Time Properties 4-17.................................................................4.4.9 Defining Entity Thresholds 4-19.............................................................4.4.10 Defining Sampling Parameters and Report Output Mode 4-21............4.4.11 Measurement Task State 4-23.............................................................

4.5 Querying or Dumping Results of a Measurement Task 4-24.........................4.5.1 Querying Results of a Measurement Task 4-24.....................................4.5.2 Dumping Results of a Measurement Task 4-29.....................................

4.6 Querying the Details of a Measurement Task 4-29........................................4.7 Modifying Configuration Information of a Measurement Task 4-31................

4.7.1 Overview of Modifying Task Configuration 4-31....................................4.7.2 Modifying Task Name 4-31....................................................................4.7.3 Modifying Task Output Mode 4-31.........................................................4.7.4 Modifying Report Output Device 4-32....................................................4.7.5 Modifying Measurement Entities 4-32....................................................4.7.6 Modifying Time Information 4-32............................................................4.7.7 Modifying Sampling Parameters 4-32....................................................4.7.8 Modifying Measurement Entity Thresholds 4-33....................................4.7.9 Deleting Measurement Entity Thresholds 4-33......................................4.7.10 Adding Measurement Object 4-33.......................................................4.7.11 Deleting Measurement Object 4-33.....................................................

4.8 Deleting a Performance Measurement Task 4-34..........................................4.9 Activating and Deactivating a Measurement Task 4-34.................................

Page 5: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

4.9.1 Overview 4-34........................................................................................4.9.2 Deactivating a Task 4-34.......................................................................4.9.3 Activating a Task 4-34............................................................................

4.10 Setting Clear Time of a Measurement Task 4-34.........................................

Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance 5-1.................................................................

5.1 Trace and Maintenance Navigation Tree 5-1...............................................5.2 Interface Trace Tasks 5-2.............................................................................

5.2.1 Overview of Interface Trace Tasks 5-2................................................5.2.2 Tracing Using Ping 5-3.........................................................................5.2.3 Tracing with Trace Route 5-5...............................................................5.2.4 Tracing MGCP Messages 5-7..............................................................5.2.5 Tracing H.248 Messages 5-11...............................................................5.2.6 Tracing MRC Messages 5-15................................................................5.2.7 Tracing SIP Messages 5-16...................................................................5.2.8 Tracing H.323 Messages 5-19...............................................................5.2.9 Tracing SCTP Messages 5-22...............................................................5.2.10 Tracing M2UA Messages 5-25.............................................................5.2.11 Tracing M3UA Messages 5-29.............................................................5.2.12 Tracing V5UA Messages 5-32.............................................................5.2.13 Tracing IUA Messages 5-35.................................................................5.2.14 Tracing MTP3 Messages 5-38.............................................................5.2.15 Tracing BRA Messages 5-41...............................................................5.2.16 Tracing PRA Messages 5-44...............................................................5.2.17 Tracing V5 Messages 5-47..................................................................5.2.18 Tracing SCCP DPC Messages 5-50....................................................5.2.19 Tracing SCCP User Messages 5-53....................................................5.2.20 Tracing SCCP MTP Messages 5-56....................................................5.2.21 Tracing TCAP SCCP Messages 5-59..................................................5.2.22 Tracing TCAP User Messages 5-61....................................................5.2.23 Tracing CSP Messages 5-64...............................................................5.2.24 Tracing Bill Messages 5-67..................................................................5.2.25 Tracing Circuit Messages 5-70............................................................5.2.26 Tracing Console Messages 5-73.........................................................5.2.27 Tracing STUN Messages 5-75.............................................................

5.3 Tracing User Signaling 5-77...........................................................................5.3.1 Overview of User Trace Tasks 5-77.......................................................5.3.2 Tracing Interface Signaling 5-78............................................................5.3.3 Tracing Call Connections 5-81...............................................................

5.4 Using Maintenance Management Node 5-85.................................................5.4.1 Overview of Maintenance Management Node 5-85...............................

Page 6: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

5.4.2 Querying CPU Usage 5-86....................................................................5.4.3 Querying Memory Usage 5-87...............................................................5.4.4 Querying Inquire Memory 5-89..............................................................5.4.5 Dumping Memory Content 5-91.............................................................5.4.6 Querying MTP3 Link Status 5-92...........................................................5.4.7 Querying No.7 Link Status 5-93.............................................................5.4.8 Querying Media Gateway Status 5-94...................................................5.4.9 Querying H.323/SIP Terminal Status 5-95.............................................5.4.10 Querying MGCP/H.248 Terminal Status 5-96......................................5.4.11 Querying Module Communication Status 5-97....................................

5.5 Exporting and Reviewing Trace Results 5-98................................................5.5.1 Processing Trace Results 5-98..............................................................5.5.2 Using Trace Viewer 5-99........................................................................

5.6 Analyzing Signaling Trace Results 5-102.........................................................5.6.1 Functions of Signaling Analysis 5-102.....................................................5.6.2 Description of Signaling Analysis Interface 5-103....................................5.6.3 Signaling Analysis Operations 5-104.......................................................

Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM 6-1.........................................................................

6.1 Using BAM Application Software 6-1............................................................6.1.1 Understanding Meanings of Service Processes 6-1............................6.1.2 Starting BAM Application Software 6-1................................................6.1.3 Using Service Management Process 6-4.............................................6.1.4 Configuring Server Startup Information 6-5.........................................

6.2 Using BAM Server Gateway Tool 6-6...........................................................6.2.1 Starting BAM Server Gateway Tool 6-6...............................................6.2.2 Creating Connection 6-7......................................................................6.2.3 Interrupting Connection 6-9..................................................................

6.3 Using Workstation Gateway Tool 6-9...........................................................6.3.1 Starting Workstation Gateway Tool 6-10...............................................6.3.2 Creating Connection 6-10......................................................................6.3.3 Interrupting Connection 6-12..................................................................

6.4 Using BAM Service 6-12................................................................................6.5 Using Smirror Process 6-15...........................................................................6.6 Using Automatic Login Tool 6-16...................................................................

AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools A-1....................................................

A.1 Using TableBrowse A-1................................................................................A.1.1 Classifying Data on BAM A-1...............................................................A.1.2 Starting TableBrowse A-1....................................................................A.1.3 Using File Menus A-3...........................................................................

Page 7: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

A.1.4 Using Tools Menus A-3........................................................................A.1.5 Using View Menus A-7.........................................................................A.1.6 Using Window Menus A-7....................................................................A.1.7 Using Shortcut menus A-8...................................................................A.1.8 Displaying Version A-9.........................................................................A.1.9 Using Toolbar A-10................................................................................A.1.10 Using Shortcut Keys A-10....................................................................

A.2 Using ExTableBrowse A-11............................................................................A.2.1 Classifying Data on Host A-11...............................................................A.2.2 Using ExTableBrowse A-11...................................................................A.2.3 Using Toolbar A-14................................................................................

AppendixB Acronyms and Abbreviations B-1.....................................................

Page 8: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

HUAWEI

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual – GUI Guide

V300R003

Page 9: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System

Operation Manual

Volume GUI Guide

Manual Version T2-011637-20040331-C-3.30

Product Version V300R003

BOM 31161637

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service. Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,

Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China

Postal Code: 518129

Website: http://www.huawei.com

Email: [email protected]

Page 10: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Copyright © 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved

No part of this manual may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Trademarks

, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET, , ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,

TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800, TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN, HUAWEI OptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye, Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All other trademarks mentioned in this manual are the property of their respective holders.

Notice

The information in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this manual to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this manual do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.

Page 11: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

About This Manual

Release Notes

The manual applies to U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System V300R003.

Related Manuals

The related manuals are listed in the following table.

Manual Content

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-System Description

It provides an overall introduction to the SoftX3000, including product features, applications, and technical specifications.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-System Principle

It details on the hardware architecture, component interworking mechanism, and subsystems of alarm, billing, and clock in the SoftX3000.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Description Manual

It details the features and technical specifications of the hardware components of the SoftX3000, including cabinets, frames, boards, cables, and cabinet internal components.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Service and Features Manual

It covers various services and functions supported by the SoftX3000, including voice services, supplementary services, IP Centrex services, multi-media services, value added services, dual homing functions, charging functions, IPTN functions, remote network access functions, and so on.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Hardware Installation Manual

It details the installation procedure of the SoftX3000 hardware components, and matters needing attention during the installation process.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Software Installation Manual

It covers the detailed procedure of installing the SoftX3000 software, including BAM server, emergency workstation, and client, focusing on the key points that might cause installation failure.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Routine Maintenance Guide

It guides the maintenance engineers to perform daily maintenance, monthly maintenance, and yearly maintenance tasks on the SoftX3000.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Emergency Maintenance Manual

It guides the maintenance engineers to perform recovery operations in the case of emergencies, such as congestion of global service, AMG, and TMG, and failure of host and BAM.

Page 12: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Manual Content

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Part Replacement Guide

It guides the maintenance engineers on how to replace hardware components of the SoftX3000, such as boards, fan frame, LAN Switch, and hard disk.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Configuration Guide

It guides the engineers how to configure various data in the SoftX3000, including configuration steps, preparations, database table referencing relationships, and command parameters.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Configuration Examples

It guides the engineers how to configure various data in the SoftX3000, including networking example, configuration script, key parameters and debugging guidance.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-Traffic Measurement

It guides the engineers how to perform traffic measurement operations and how to analyze traffic measurement results.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Operation Manual-GUI Guide

It guides the engineers how to use the GUI on various clients of the SoftX3000, including operations on menus and navigation tree. In addition, it introduces the operations on TableBrowse.

U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System BAM User Manual

It guides the engineers how to install and use the software related to the BAM, including remote maintenance software, anti-virus software, system customized software, and so on.

U-SYS iGateway Bill User Manual It elaborates on the functioning principle of the iGateway Bill. Also, it teaches you on how to install, maintain, and operate the product.

Organization

The manual describes the traffic measurement operations and applications in SoftX3000 V300R002.

There are six chapters and two Appendixes in the manual.

Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI introduces the components of SoftX3000 operation and maintenance system.

Chapter 2 Using MML Client guides you on all available operations on the client. Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System details the operations on the

alarm management system. Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System elaborates the operations

on the performance management system. Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance presents the tasks applied in tracing and

maintenance of the SoftX3000. Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM presents the guidance on using the GUI

components on the BAM.

Page 13: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Appendix A Using Data Table Tools details the operations on using TableBrowse and ExTableBrowse.

Appendix B Acronyms and Abbreviations lists the main abbreviations used in this manual and the corresponding full expressions.

Intended Readers

The manual is intended for the following readers:

NGN network planning experts NGN network administrators NGN system engineers

Conventions

The manual uses the following conventions:

I. General conventions

Convention Description

Arial Normal paragraphs are in Arial.

Arial Narrow Warnings, Cautions, Notes and Tips are in Arial Narrow.

Boldface Headings are in Boldface.

II. Command conventions

Convention Description

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in Boldface.

III. GUI conventions

Convention Description

< > Button names are inside angle brackets. For example, click the <OK> button.

[ ] Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.

/ Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example, [File/Create/Folder].

Page 14: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

IV. Mouse operation

Action Description

Click Press the left button or right button quickly (left button by default).

Double Click Press the left button twice continuously and quickly.

V. Symbols

Eye-catching symbols are also used in the manual to highlight the points worthy of special attention during the operation. They are defined as follows:

Caution Means reader be extremely careful during the operation.

Note Means a complementary description.

Page 15: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Table of Contents

i

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI ...................................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Composition of GUI ........................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Description of GUI Components ........................................................................................ 1-1

1.2.1 Overview of GUI Components ................................................................................ 1-1 1.2.2 Menu Bar................................................................................................................. 1-2 1.2.3 Toolbar .................................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2.4 Navigation Tree....................................................................................................... 1-3 1.2.5 System Result Pane................................................................................................ 1-4 1.2.6 Command Window.................................................................................................. 1-4 1.2.7 Shortcut Keys .......................................................................................................... 1-6 1.2.8 GUI Applications on the BAM.................................................................................. 1-6 1.2.9 GUI Applications on the Client ................................................................................ 1-7

1.3 Starting GUI ....................................................................................................................... 1-8 1.3.1 Starting MML Client................................................................................................. 1-8 1.3.2 Starting Alarm Management System ...................................................................... 1-9 1.3.3 Starting Performance Management System ......................................................... 1-10

Chapter 2 Using MML Client......................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1 Using System Menus......................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1.1 Logging In................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.1.2 Re-logging In ........................................................................................................... 2-1 2.1.3 Logging Out............................................................................................................. 2-2 2.1.4 Changing Password ................................................................................................ 2-2 2.1.5 Managing Office Information ................................................................................... 2-3 2.1.6 Setting Output Configurations ................................................................................. 2-7 2.1.7 Setting Command Timeout Duration..................................................................... 2-10 2.1.8 Saving Input Commands....................................................................................... 2-10 2.1.9 Executing Commands in Batch ............................................................................. 2-11 2.1.10 Stopping Executing Commands in Batch............................................................ 2-18 2.1.11 Setting Printing Options ...................................................................................... 2-19 2.1.12 Printing in Real Time........................................................................................... 2-19 2.1.13 Flushing Printer ................................................................................................... 2-19 2.1.14 Locking Client...................................................................................................... 2-20 2.1.15 Automatically Locking Client ............................................................................... 2-20 2.1.16 Exiting.................................................................................................................. 2-21

2.2 Using Service Menus....................................................................................................... 2-21 2.2.1 Starting Alarm Management System .................................................................... 2-21 2.2.2 Starting Performance Management System ......................................................... 2-22

Page 16: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Table of Contents

ii

2.3 Using Authority Menus..................................................................................................... 2-22 2.3.1 Classification Operation Authorities ...................................................................... 2-22 2.3.2 Adding Operator Account...................................................................................... 2-23 2.3.3 Modifying Operator Account.................................................................................. 2-24 2.3.4 Deleting Operator Account.................................................................................... 2-26 2.3.5 Adding Workstation ............................................................................................... 2-26 2.3.6 Modifying Workstation........................................................................................... 2-27 2.3.7 Deleting Workstation ............................................................................................. 2-28 2.3.8 Setting Command Group ...................................................................................... 2-29

2.4 Using View Menus ........................................................................................................... 2-30 2.4.1 Overview of Using View Menus ............................................................................ 2-30 2.4.2 Showing or Hiding Windows ................................................................................. 2-30 2.4.3 Showing Tools and Status .................................................................................... 2-31

2.5 Using Window Menus ...................................................................................................... 2-31 2.5.1 Cascading Windows.............................................................................................. 2-31 2.5.2 Tiling Windows Horizontally .................................................................................. 2-32

2.6 Using Help Menus............................................................................................................ 2-33 2.6.1 Using SoftX3000 Online Book............................................................................... 2-33 2.6.2 Using Help Topics ................................................................................................. 2-35 2.6.3 Calling Online Help of Dialog Box......................................................................... 2-36 2.6.4 Calling Pop-Up Online Help .................................................................................. 2-36 2.6.5 Querying Version................................................................................................... 2-37

2.7 Using Management Tab .................................................................................................. 2-38 2.7.1 Overview of Management Tab.............................................................................. 2-38 2.7.2 Browsing Device Panel ......................................................................................... 2-39 2.7.3 Displaying Board Information ................................................................................ 2-41 2.7.4 Resetting Boards................................................................................................... 2-42 2.7.5 Swapping Boards .................................................................................................. 2-43 2.7.6 Querying CPU Usage............................................................................................ 2-43 2.7.7 Querying Memory Usage ...................................................................................... 2-44 2.7.8 Configuring Subscriber Data ................................................................................. 2-45 2.7.9 Maintaining Subscriber Data ................................................................................. 2-46

2.8 Using MML Navigation Tree ............................................................................................ 2-47 2.8.1 Overview of Using MML Navigation Tree ............................................................. 2-47 2.8.2 Using Common Maintenance Pane ...................................................................... 2-47 2.8.3 Querying History Commands ................................................................................ 2-49 2.8.4 Querying Online Help............................................................................................ 2-51

2.9 Using Monitor Tab ........................................................................................................... 2-51 2.9.1 Overview of Using Monitor Tab............................................................................. 2-51 2.9.2 Trace Management Tasks .................................................................................... 2-52 2.9.3 Maintenance Management Tasks......................................................................... 2-53

2.10 Using the Toolbar .......................................................................................................... 2-53

Page 17: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Table of Contents

iii

Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System............................................................................. 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management System .......................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Classification of Alarms ..................................................................................................... 3-1

3.2.1 Classifying Alarms by Type..................................................................................... 3-1 3.2.2 Classifying Alarms by Level .................................................................................... 3-2

3.3 Generic Operations............................................................................................................ 3-3 3.3.1 Starting Alarm Management System ...................................................................... 3-3 3.3.2 Customizing Alarm Colors....................................................................................... 3-4

3.4 Browsing Alarms................................................................................................................ 3-5 3.4.1 Browsing Fault Alarms ............................................................................................ 3-6 3.4.2 Browsing Event Alarms ........................................................................................... 3-7 3.4.3 Browsing History Alarms ......................................................................................... 3-8 3.4.4 Defining Alarm Filter Settings.................................................................................. 3-8 3.4.5 Filtering Alarms of Malicious Calls and Emergency Calls....................................... 3-9

3.5 Querying Alarms ................................................................................................................ 3-9 3.5.1 Notes on Querying Alarms ...................................................................................... 3-9 3.5.2 Operation Procedure............................................................................................... 3-9

3.6 Alarm Management Operations....................................................................................... 3-10 3.6.1 Deleting History Alarms......................................................................................... 3-10 3.6.2 Masking Alarms..................................................................................................... 3-11 3.6.3 Querying Alarm Configurations ............................................................................. 3-13 3.6.4 Defining Alarm Box Control Settings..................................................................... 3-14 3.6.5 Defining Alarm Statistics ....................................................................................... 3-14 3.6.6 Defining Alarm Box Screen Level ......................................................................... 3-16 3.6.7 Querying Alarm Box Screen Level ........................................................................ 3-17 3.6.8 Defining Sound Durations for Fault Alarms........................................................... 3-17

3.7 Using Other Alarm Related Options ................................................................................ 3-18 3.7.1 Overview of Other Alarm Related Options............................................................ 3-18 3.7.2 Using Shortcut Menu............................................................................................. 3-18 3.7.3 Querying Alarm Explanation Details ..................................................................... 3-19 3.7.4 Saving Alarm Content to File ................................................................................ 3-20 3.7.5 Recovering an Alarm............................................................................................. 3-20 3.7.6 Acknowledging an Alarm....................................................................................... 3-21 3.7.7 Clearing Recovery Alarms .................................................................................... 3-21

3.8 Defining Print Options...................................................................................................... 3-23 3.8.1 Overview of Using Print Options ........................................................................... 3-23 3.8.2 Defining Real Time Print Filter Settings ................................................................ 3-23 3.8.3 Printing Alarm Details in Real Time ...................................................................... 3-23 3.8.4 Flushing the Printer ............................................................................................... 3-23

Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System................................................................. 4-1 4.1 Overview of Performance Measurement ........................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Generic Operations............................................................................................................ 4-1

Page 18: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Table of Contents

iv

4.2.1 Workflow of Performance Measurement................................................................. 4-1 4.2.2 Logging in to the Performance Management System............................................. 4-2

4.3 Cautions and Notes ........................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3.1 Maximum Number of Tasks .................................................................................... 4-4 4.3.2 User Authority.......................................................................................................... 4-4 4.3.3 Measurement entities.............................................................................................. 4-5 4.3.4 BAM time................................................................................................................. 4-5

4.4 Creating a Performance Measurement Task..................................................................... 4-6 4.4.1 General Workflow.................................................................................................... 4-6 4.4.2 Customizing an Entity ............................................................................................. 4-7 4.4.3 Launching the Task Creation Interface ................................................................. 4-10 4.4.4 Defining Task Attributes ........................................................................................ 4-11 4.4.5 Selecting a Measurement Unit .............................................................................. 4-12 4.4.6 Selecting Measurement Entities............................................................................ 4-12 4.4.7 Selecting a Measurement Object .......................................................................... 4-15 4.4.8 Setting Time Properties......................................................................................... 4-17 4.4.9 Defining Entity Thresholds .................................................................................... 4-19 4.4.10 Defining Sampling Parameters and Report Output Mode .................................. 4-21 4.4.11 Measurement Task State .................................................................................... 4-23

4.5 Querying or Dumping Results of a Measurement Task................................................... 4-24 4.5.1 Querying Results of a Measurement Task............................................................ 4-24 4.5.2 Dumping Results of a Measurement Task............................................................ 4-29

4.6 Querying the Details of a Measurement Task ................................................................. 4-29 4.7 Modifying Configuration Information of a Measurement Task......................................... 4-31

4.7.1 Overview of Modifying Task Configuration ........................................................... 4-31 4.7.2 Modifying Task Name ........................................................................................... 4-31 4.7.3 Modifying Task Output Mode ................................................................................ 4-31 4.7.4 Modifying Report Output Device ........................................................................... 4-32 4.7.5 Modifying Measurement Entities ........................................................................... 4-32 4.7.6 Modifying Time Information................................................................................... 4-32 4.7.7 Modifying Sampling Parameters ........................................................................... 4-32 4.7.8 Modifying Measurement Entity Thresholds........................................................... 4-33 4.7.9 Deleting Measurement Entity Thresholds ............................................................. 4-33 4.7.10 Adding Measurement Object............................................................................... 4-33 4.7.11 Deleting Measurement Object............................................................................. 4-33

4.8 Deleting a Performance Measurement Task ................................................................... 4-34 4.9 Activating and Deactivating a Measurement Task .......................................................... 4-34

4.9.1 Overview ............................................................................................................... 4-34 4.9.2 Deactivating a Task............................................................................................... 4-34 4.9.3 Activating a Task................................................................................................... 4-34

4.10 Setting Clear Time of a Measurement Task .................................................................. 4-34

Page 19: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Table of Contents

v

Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance............................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 Trace and Maintenance Navigation Tree .......................................................................... 5-1 5.2 Interface Trace Tasks ........................................................................................................ 5-2

5.2.1 Overview of Interface Trace Tasks ......................................................................... 5-2 5.2.2 Tracing Using Ping.................................................................................................. 5-3 5.2.3 Tracing with Trace Route ........................................................................................ 5-4 5.2.4 Tracing MGCP Messages ....................................................................................... 5-7 5.2.5 Tracing H.248 Messages ...................................................................................... 5-10 5.2.6 Tracing MRC Messages........................................................................................ 5-13 5.2.7 Tracing SIP Messages .......................................................................................... 5-15 5.2.8 Tracing H.323 Messages ...................................................................................... 5-18 5.2.9 Tracing SCTP Messages ...................................................................................... 5-21 5.2.10 Tracing M2UA Messages.................................................................................... 5-24 5.2.11 Tracing M3UA Messages.................................................................................... 5-28 5.2.12 Tracing V5UA Messages .................................................................................... 5-31 5.2.13 Tracing IUA Messages........................................................................................ 5-34 5.2.14 Tracing MTP3 Messages .................................................................................... 5-37 5.2.15 Tracing BRA Messages ...................................................................................... 5-40 5.2.16 Tracing PRA Messages ...................................................................................... 5-43 5.2.17 Tracing V5 Messages ......................................................................................... 5-46 5.2.18 Tracing SCCP DPC Messages ........................................................................... 5-49 5.2.19 Tracing SCCP USER Messages......................................................................... 5-52 5.2.20 Tracing SCCP MTP Messages ........................................................................... 5-55 5.2.21 Tracing TCAP SCCP Messages ......................................................................... 5-58 5.2.22 Tracing TCAP USER Messages ......................................................................... 5-60 5.2.23 Tracing CSP Messages ...................................................................................... 5-63 5.2.24 Tracing Bill Messages ......................................................................................... 5-66 5.2.25 Tracing Circuit Messages.................................................................................... 5-69 5.2.26 Tracing Console Messages................................................................................. 5-72 5.2.27 Tracing STUN Messages .................................................................................... 5-74

5.3 Tracing User Signaling .................................................................................................... 5-76 5.3.1 Overview of User Trace Tasks.............................................................................. 5-76 5.3.2 Tracing Interface Signaling ................................................................................... 5-77 5.3.3 Tracing Call Connections ...................................................................................... 5-80

5.4 Using Maintenance Management Node .......................................................................... 5-84 5.4.1 Overview of Maintenance Management Node...................................................... 5-84 5.4.2 Querying CPU Usage............................................................................................ 5-85 5.4.3 Querying Memory Usage ...................................................................................... 5-86 5.4.4 Querying Memory Content .................................................................................... 5-88 5.4.5 Dumping Memory Content .................................................................................... 5-90 5.4.6 Querying MTP3 Link Status .................................................................................. 5-91 5.4.7 Querying No.7 Link Status .................................................................................... 5-92

Page 20: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Table of Contents

vi

5.4.8 Querying Media Gateway Status .......................................................................... 5-93 5.4.9 Querying H.323/SIP Terminal Status.................................................................... 5-94 5.4.10 Querying MGCP/H.248 Terminal Status............................................................. 5-95 5.4.11 Querying Module Communication Status ........................................................... 5-96

5.5 Exporting and Reviewing Trace Results.......................................................................... 5-97 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results ..................................................................................... 5-97 5.5.2 Using Trace Viewer............................................................................................... 5-98

5.6 Analyzing Signaling Trace Results ................................................................................ 5-101 5.6.1 Functions of Signaling Analysis .......................................................................... 5-101 5.6.2 Description of Signaling Analysis Interface......................................................... 5-102 5.6.3 Signaling Analysis Operations ............................................................................ 5-103

Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM....................................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Using BAM Application Software....................................................................................... 6-1

6.1.1 Understanding Meanings of Service Processes ..................................................... 6-1 6.1.2 Starting BAM Application Software ......................................................................... 6-1 6.1.3 Using Service Management Process...................................................................... 6-4 6.1.4 Configuring Server Startup Information .................................................................. 6-5

6.2 Using BAM Server Gateway Tool ...................................................................................... 6-6 6.2.1 Starting BAM Server Gateway Tool ........................................................................ 6-6 6.2.2 Creating Connection ............................................................................................... 6-7 6.2.3 Interrupting Connection........................................................................................... 6-9

6.3 Using Workstation Gateway Tool ...................................................................................... 6-9 6.3.1 Starting Workstation Gateway Tool....................................................................... 6-10 6.3.2 Creating Connection ............................................................................................. 6-10 6.3.3 Interrupting Connection......................................................................................... 6-12

6.4 Using BAM Service.......................................................................................................... 6-12 6.5 Using Smirror Process..................................................................................................... 6-15 6.6 Using Automatic Login Tool............................................................................................. 6-16

AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools .................................................................................A-1 A.1 Using TableBrowse ...........................................................................................................A-1

A.1.1 Classifying Data on BAM........................................................................................A-1 A.1.2 Starting TableBrowse .............................................................................................A-1 A.1.3 Using File Menus ....................................................................................................A-3 A.1.4 Using Tools Menus .................................................................................................A-3 A.1.5 Using View Menus ..................................................................................................A-7 A.1.6 Using Window Menus .............................................................................................A-7 A.1.7 Using Shortcut menus ............................................................................................A-8 A.1.8 Displaying Version ..................................................................................................A-9 A.1.9 Using Toolbar........................................................................................................A-10 A.1.10 Using Shortcut Keys ...........................................................................................A-10

A.2 Using ExTableBrowse .....................................................................................................A-11 A.2.1 Classifying Data on Host ......................................................................................A-11

Page 21: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Table of Contents

vii

A.2.2 Using ExTableBrowse ..........................................................................................A-11 A.2.3 Using Toolbar........................................................................................................A-14

AppendixB Acronyms and Abbreviations ..................................................................................B-1

Page 22: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-1

Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1.1 Composition of GUI The GUI mentioned throughout this manual refers to the graphic user interface provided by BAM server software, client software, and emergency workstation software.

The SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance System works in client/server architecture. The BAM server is the server side, which manages and maintains the SoftX3000. The BAM server receives the maintenance and operation commands from a local or remote end, sends them to a specific host or terminal, and waits to process the response messages. The BAM server also stores and transfers the alarm and performance measurement data, and provides multisided and remote maintenance to the SoftX3000. BAM works as a database, and also a communication channel between the host and the maintenance terminals.

The client software is installed on maintenance terminals. In addition, when you install the BAM server software and emergency workstation software, the client software is also installed.

The emergency workstation is the backup of the BAM server. It will function when the BAM server fails.

The operations on the BAM server, maintenance terminals (also known as ordinary workstation), and emergency workstation are the same. This chapter will elaborate on the operations on maintenance terminals.

1.2 Description of GUI Components

1.2.1 Overview of GUI Components

As shown in Figure 1-1, the GUI of the SoftX3000 client comprises five components:

Menu bar Toolbar Navigation tree Result window Command window

Page 23: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-2

(1)

(2)

(3)(5)

(6)

(8)

(4)

(7)

Command Window

(1) Menu bar (2) Toolbar (3) Navigation tree (4) System result pane (5) Operation result pane (6) Command input pane (7) History command box (8) Command input box

Figure 1-1 GUI of client

1.2.2 Menu Bar

The menu bar contains six menu items:

System Service Authority View Window Help

Table 1-1 lists the functions of the menus.

Table 1-1 Functions of menus

Menu item Functions

System Implements re-login, logout, modify password, office direction management, lock/unlock client, auto lock setting, output window setting, execute batch commands, command timeout setting, and print functions.

Service Starts alarm management system and performance management system.

Page 24: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-3

Menu item Functions

Authority Manages operator accounts, command groups, and workstation authorities.

View Shows/hides toolbar and panes, customizes wizard window, and shows task progress.

Window Sets the display mode.

Help Displays the online help and version of client software.

1.2.3 Toolbar

The toolbar contains icons of frequently used operations. These icons provide the same functions as some of the menus. Table 1-2 lists the functions of the icons.

Table 1-2 Functions of icons in the toolbar

Icon Function

Re-login

Shows/hides navigation tree

Shows/hides output window.

Shows/hides command window

Shows/hides wizard window

Prints

Shows online help of the menu item

1.2.4 Navigation Tree

The navigation tree window contains four tabs:

Management MML Commands Monitor Search

Table 1-3 shows the functions of the four tabs.

Page 25: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-4

Table 1-3 Functions of tabs in the navigation tree

Tabs Functions

Provides subscriber management and device management functions.

Provides a tree-shape navigation of MML commands.

Provides signaling interface trace, user interface trace, and device maintenance functions.

Provides the fuzzy search function. You can search MML commands by entering the key words.

1.2.5 System Result Pane

The system result pane contains four tabs:

Management Alarm Performance Debug

Table 1-4 shows the functions of the four tabs.

Table 1-4 Functions of tabs in the system result pane

Tabs Functions

Management Exports all information related to operation and maintenance and MML commands, including the results of scripts returned from the BAM.

Debug Exports information related to software debugging.

Performance Exports information related to performance measurement.

Alarm Exports information related to alarm management system.

1.2.6 Command Window

I. Overview of Command Window

The command windows consists of five parts—operation result pane, command input pane, history command box, command input box, and shortcut icons.

II. Operation Result Pane

The operation result pane contains three tabs:

Common Maintenance History Command

Page 26: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-5

Help Information

Table 1-5 shows the functions of the three tabs.

Table 1-5 Functions of tabs in the operation result pane

Tabs Functions

Common Maintenance Returns the execution results of commands from the BAM.

History Command Records all executed commands in the current login, including unsuccessful ones.

Help Information Display the online help for commands and nodes in the navigation tree. Each help page includes the functions, notes, parameter description, and examples.

III. Command Input Pane

The command input pane displays the command to be sent from the client to the BAM. It has two functions:

Displays the commands you enter in the command input box and the command script by selecting the commands in the history command box.

Provides an input interface for command scripts.

IV. History Command Box

The history command box displays the commands that have been successfully executed in the current login. At maximum, the system can store 1000 history commands. The default setting is 100 history commands.

You can modify the number of history commands. In addition, the history commands are also displayed in the “history command” tab of the operation result pane. Refer to section 2.8.3 querying history commands for details.

V. Command Input Box

The command input box is where you enter and run MML commands. You also have to specify the parameters under the command input box.

There are two types of parameters. The red ones are mandatory parameters, and the black ones are optional.

VI. Shortcut Icons

There are four icons right to the history command box and command input box. Table 1-6 lists their functions.

Page 27: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-6

Table 1-6 Functions of the icons

Shortcut icons Functions

Select the next history command. (Shortcut key <F8>)

Select the previous history command. (Shortcut key <F7>)

Display parameter input pane. (Shortcut key<Enter>)

Execute the command. (Shortcut key <F9>)

1.2.7 Shortcut Keys

The client software has some shortcut keys to help you use the client efficiently. Table 1-7 lists the functions of the shortcut keys.

Table 1-7 Functions of shortcut keys

Shortcut keys Functions

F1 Display the online help of the current window.

F2 Show/hide the navigation tree.

F3 Show/hide the system result pane.

F4 Show/hide the command window.

F6 Clear all information in the common maintenance pane.

F7 Select the previous history command in the command window.

F8 Select the next history command in the command window.

F9 Display all command scripts in the command input pane.

1.2.8 GUI Applications on the BAM

The GUI applications on the BAM are distributed in two program folders: U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center and Administrative Tools.

You can select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center] to use a specific function from the list as shown in Figure 1-2.

Page 28: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-7

Figure 1-2 GUI applications on the BAM

There are two processes involved in the GUI applications on the BAM:

BAM Service Smirror

You can start or stop them in the service window by selecting [Start/Programs/Administrative Tools/Services].

Note:

All GUI applications are running on Windows 2000 Server and SQL Server 2000.

1.2.9 GUI Applications on the Client

The GUI applications on the client are included in U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center.

You can select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center] to use a specific function from the list as shown in Figure 1-3.

Figure 1-3 GUI applications on the client

Page 29: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-8

Note:

On the client, you cannot use the AutoLogin Tool to set the automatic login of the system.

The client does not have the following features comparing with the GUI applications on the BAM:

U-SYS SoftX3000 Server U-SYS SoftX3000 Server Gateway Tool Administrative Tools

1.3 Starting GUI

1.3.1 Starting MML Client

You can start the MML client from the windows [Start] menu. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance System], and the [Operator Login] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 1-4.

Figure 1-4 Logging in the system

2) Select the office in the drop-down list box "Office Name".

When you select another office, the IP address displayed in the “Office IP Address” will also change accordingly. Here we select “SZ-SOFTX3000”.

3) Enter the account and password. 4) Click <OK>.

Page 30: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-9

When the BAM to log in is an authorized one, its IP address will be displayed in the status area at the bottom right corner, indicating that connection success, as shown in Figure 1-5.

Figure 1-5 Connected to BAM

1.3.2 Starting Alarm Management System

You can start the alarm management system from the windows [Start] menu. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance System/U-SYS SoftX3000 Alarm Management System], and the [Operator Login] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 1-6.

Figure 1-6 Starting the alarm management system from windows start menu

2) Select the office in the drop-down list box "Office Name". 3) Enter the operator name and password. 4) Click <OK>. The system will start the alarm management system, as shown in

Figure 1-7.

Page 31: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 1 Introduction to GUI

1-10

Figure 1-7 Main interface of alarm management system

Note:

Here we only introduce how to start the alarm management system. For its usage, refer to chapter 3 “Using Alarm Management System”.

1.3.3 Starting Performance Management System

Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Performance Management System].

Note:

Here we only introduce how to start the performance management system. For its usage, refer to chapter 4 “Using Performance Management System”.

Page 32: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-1

Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2.1 Using System Menus

2.1.1 Logging In

Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance System], and the [Operator Login] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-1.

Figure 2-1 Logging in the system

2) Select the office in the drop-down list box "Office Name".

When you select another office, the IP address displayed in “Office IP Address” will change accordingly. Here we select “SZ-SOFTX3000”.

3) Enter the account and password. 4) Click <OK>.

When the BAM to log in is an authorized one, its IP address will be displayed in the status area at the bottom right corner, indicating that the connection succeeds, as shown in Figure 2-2.

Figure 2-2 Connected to BAM

2.1.2 Re-logging In

If you want to log in with another account after logging in the system, proceed as follows:

Page 33: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-2

1) Select [System/Relogin] in the main interface of the client, and the confirmation dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-3.

Figure 2-3 Confirming to re-log in

2) Select <Yes>. The [Operator Login] dialog box will appear.

You can now log in with another account.

2.1.3 Logging Out

To log out without exiting the client, proceed as follows:

1) Select [System/Logout] in the main interface of the client, and the confirmation dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-4.

Figure 2-4 Confirming to log out

2) Click <Yes>. Now “Disconnected” will be displayed in the status area, as shown in Figure 2-5.

Figure 2-5 Disconnected from BAM

2.1.4 Changing Password

Proceed as follows to change the password of the current account:

1) Select [System/Change Password] in the main interface of the client, and the confirmation dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-6.

Page 34: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-3

Figure 2-6 [Change password] dialog box

2) Enter the three fields in Figure 2-6. 3) Click <OK>.

Note:

If you forget your password, contact the administrator to get a new one. Change your password regularly. The password should be at least six digits.

2.1.5 Managing Office Information

I. Overview of Managing Office Information

If you have not added the IP address of any BAM when installing the client software, the information displayed in Figure 2-1 will be blank. You have to add the IP address of a valid BAM before logging in to it.

II. Setting Office Information

Proceed as follows:

1) Select the <Office…> button to the right of “Office Name” in Figure 2-1, and the [Manage Office Information] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-7.

Page 35: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-4

Figure 2-7 Setting office information

Note:

Alternatively, you can set the office information by selecting [System/Office Management] in the main window of the client. The same dialog box will appear as shown in Figure 2-7.

If the client is installed on a BAM, the system has automatically assigned the IP address 127.0.0.1 to the client.

2) Enter the office name, for instance, SZ-SOFFX3000. 3) Enter the public IP address of the BAM. Here, take 10.70.33.62 for an example. 4) Click <Set>, and the office information setting is complete as shown in Figure 2-8.

Page 36: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-5

Figure 2-8 Setting office information complete

To add another office, enter the office name and IP address, and click <Set>. When you have completed adding offices, click <Close>.

III. Removing Office Information

Proceed as follows:

1) Select the office to be deleted in the list of the [Manage Office Information] dialog box, as shown Figure 2-9.

2) Click <Delete>, and the confirmation dialog box appears as shown in Figure 2-10. 3) Click <Yes>, and the selected office is deleted.

Page 37: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-6

Figure 2-9 Selecting the office to be deleted

Figure 2-10 Confirming to delete the office

IV. Modifying Office Information

Proceed as follows:

1) Select the office to be modified in the [Manage Office Information] dialog box. 2) Change the IP address. 3) Click <Set>, and the information of the office is changed.

Note:

You can only change the IP address of the office in the above method. To change the office name, you have to delete it and add another one.

Page 38: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-7

2.1.6 Setting Output Configurations

I. Overview of Setting Output Configuration

The output information, including the maintenance, alarm, performance measurement, and software commissioning information, are helpful in locating faults during deployment, upgrade, and daily maintenance. However, the browsing space in the output pane is limited. It can be difficult to read the output information, especially when there is huge output.

To solve the problem, you can save the output information over a certain period to a text file in the local hard disk for future reference.

II. Operation Procedure

Proceed as follows to save the output information:

1) Select [System/Output Window Setting…] in the main interface of the client, and the [Output Configuration] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-11.

2) You can select the four panes to define the output settings of maintenance information, alarm information, performance measurement information, and software commissioning information respectively.

Figure 2-11 Setting output configuration

3) Take maintenance information for an instance. Select “Maintain Output” pane.

4) In the “Output to file” field, select the button right to “Output”, and the [Save Output File As] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-12.

Page 39: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-8

5) Specify the path and name of the output file.

Figure 2-12 Saving the output file

Note:

The default path is D:\SoftX3000\Output, and the default file type is text format *.txt.

6) Click <Save>, and the system returns to the [Output Configuration] dialog box.

The “Output” column displays the path and name of the output file. The check box to the

right of the button indicates that the maintenance information is ready to be save to a specific file, as shown in Figure 2-13.

Page 40: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-9

Figure 2-13 Setting output configuration

Note:

In the [Output to file] field, the “Auto save” option defines the maximum capacity of output files (unlimited by default), and the “Time output to file” defines the time segment during which the system exports the information to files.

If you do not want to print the maintenance information immediately, deselect the check box [To printer] in the [Printer] field, and then click <OK>. The system starts to store the maintenance information to a designated file.

III. Exporting Information to File

To stop exporting the maintenance information to a file, proceed as follows:

Solution 1

1) Select [System/Output Window Setting] on the client. The [Output Configuration] dialog box appears.

2) Clear the check box to the right of 3) Click <OK>.

Solution 2

Close the client software directly, that is, select [System/Exit] on the client.

Page 41: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-10

2.1.7 Setting Command Timeout Duration

You need to adjust the command timeout duration according to the communication status between the client and the Bam. When there are frequent "no responses" from the BAM, proceed as follows:

1) Select [System/Command Timeout Setting…] in the main interface of the client, and the [Command Time Out] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-14.

Figure 2-14 Setting command timeout duration

2) When you finish setting, click <OK>.

Table 2-1 Description of command timeout parameters

Command description MML Command Time Out Monitor Command Time Out

Meaning The maximum duration from a command is sent to the BAM to the BAM responses

Types Text Binary

Location MML navigation tree Monitor navigation tree

Unit Second Second

Range of value 20–600 10–100

Default value 80 20

If no response is received from the BAM, the client will render the operation failure.

2.1.8 Saving Input Commands

You can save the MML commands executed at the client to a text file for future reference. When you repeat the operation, or carry a batch of commands similar to the saved input ones, you can directly use the text file. During daily maintenance, you have to frequently query the status of the equipment and the network, CPU usage, signaling link status, and gateway registration status.

Page 42: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-11

In this case, you can use the saved input commands to improve the efficiency.

Proceed as follows to save the input commands:

1) Select [System/Save Input Commands] (or press shortcut key <Ctrl+S>), and the [Save input commands to file] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-15.

Figure 2-15 Saving the input commands to file

Note:

The default path of output file is D:\SoftX3000\Output. The default file type is text. The naming convention for the output file is CMD-YYMMDDHHMM, in which YY stands for two digits of year, MM stands for month, DD stands for date, HH stands for hour, and MM stands for minute.

2) Specify the path and name of the output file in Figure 2-15. 3) When you finish setting, click <Save>.

Now the option “Save Input Commands” will be changed to ”Stop Save Input Commands”, indicating that the system has started saving the MML commands to file.

To stop saving input commands to file, select [System/Stop Save input Commands] or press <Ctrl+S>. The option “Stop Save Input Commands” will be changed back to “Save Input Commands”, indicating that the system has finished saving the MML commands to file.

2.1.9 Executing Commands in Batch

I. Overview of Executing Commands in Batch

Executing commands in batch is to improve the efficiency of deployment, maintenance and upgrade, during which you have to execute a large amount of commands and

Page 43: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-12

which usually takes a lot of time. SoftX3000 provides a function which enables you to run a command script file instead of executing all the commands one by one.

There are two types of batch execution—immediate execution and time execution.

II. Immediately Executing Commands in Batch

It is usually used during deployment. Proceed as follows:

1) Prepare the command script file.

The script file can be made for data configuration or daily maintenance. The name can be “R2_interface.txt” for instance.

2) Log in the SoftX3000 client. 3) Select [System/Execute Batch Commands] (or press <Ctrl+E>) in the main

interface of the client, and the [Execute Batch Commands] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-16.

4) Select <Browse…> next to “Specify batch file”. Specify the storing path for the script file “R2_interface.txt”, as shown in Figure 2-16.

Figure 2-16 Executing commands in batch

5) In the [Set execution manner] field, select “Immediate execution”.

Page 44: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-13

Note:

In the “Immediate execution” mode, only one script file can be executed at a time. This mode is usually used in data configuration during deployment.

6) Click <OK>. The system will check the grammar of the script file. If no error is found, the execution dialog box will be displayed, as shown in Figure 2-17.

Figure 2-17 Results of immediate executing commands in batch

7) Select the “Execute type”. Here we select “Execute all”. 8) Click <Go>.

Here are the description of the modes:

Execute all: All commands in the script file will be executed. Execute Step by Step: You have to click <Go> after the system executed each

line. Execute with Break Point: The system executes the command lines till the first

break point. If you wish to continue execution, click <Go> and the system will continue execution till the next break point. Refer to the note after Figure 2-20 on how to set a break point.

Execute range: All commands in the range will be executed. You have to specify the range if you select this mode.

Page 45: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-14

9) The error prompt appears as shown in Figure 2-18. The cursor stops in the line of error. Click <No>. Modify the error in the script.

Figure 2-18 Error prompt when executing the script

10) Correct the error line in Figure 2-17.

This windows is similar to that of the Wordpad. It has the same shortcut keys as the wordpad, such as <Ctrl+F> for Find, <Ctrl+H> for Replace, and <Ctrl+S> for Save.

If you click <Yes> in Figure 2-18, the system skips the error line and continues the execution.

11) Select <Save>. 12) Select “Execute Step by Step” in [Execute type]. 13) Click <Go>, and the system will continue executing the script.

When the system completes the execution, the “Execute complete” prompt will be displayed. In the execution result area, you will see the details of the command lines successfully and unsuccessfully executed. It also includes the line and row number of the current error line, as shown in Figure 2-19.

Figure 2-19 Execution result area

Before execution, you can specify the “Sending commands interval(s)” (in seconds).

In addition, you can specify the path to store the details of the “Failed and unexecuted commands”. Figure 2-20 lists the content of such a file.

Page 46: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-15

Figure 2-20 An list of failed and unexecuted commands

To set break point in the script file:

14) Select the line to set the break point. 15) Click <Set breakpoint>. There will be a brown circle in front of the line, as shown in

Figure 2-21.

To clear the break point, repeat the above operation.

Page 47: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-16

Figure 2-21 Setting a break point

Note:

The lines with // are remark lines, and will be ignored and skipped during execution.

III. Executing Commands in Batch By Time

It is frequently applied in daily maintenance. Proceed as follows:

1) Prepare the command script file.

The script file can be made for data configuration or daily maintenance. The name can be “R2_interface.txt” for instance.

2) Log in the SoftX3000 client. 3) Select [System/Execute Batch Commands] (or press <Ctrl+E>) in the main

interface of the client, and the [Execute Batch Commands] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-22.

4) Select <Browse…> next to “Specify batch file”. Specify the storing path for the script file “R2_interface.txt’, as shown in Figure 2-22.

Page 48: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-17

Figure 2-22 Executing commands in batch by time

5) In the “Set execution manner” field, select “Time execution”.

The choice means that the commands in the script file will be executed at a constant interval.

Note:

You can also specify multiple script files in this mode, which is frequently applied in the query operation in daily maintenance. The default execution interval between two commands is 50 ms.

6) Specify the time and date for the first script file in “Time execution”. Click <Add>, and the file is added as shown in Figure 2-23.

7) You can repeat the above steps to add more files, as shown in Figure 2-23.

Page 49: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-18

Figure 2-23 Executing commands in batch by time

8) Click <OK> to finish the settings.

The system will automatically execute “R2_interface.txt” at 18:18 on Nov 8, 2004, and execute “add vsb.txt” at 23:50 on the same day.

Note:

When you select multiple script files in this mode, set the interval long enough so that the system can complete executing the first file before starting with the next one.

2.1.10 Stopping Executing Commands in Batch

When the system is executing the commands in batch, you can stop the following two types of modes:

Immediately executing commands in batch Executing commands in batch by time

To stop the first mode, directly click <Stop> in Figure 2-17.

Page 50: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-19

In the second mode, the system will automatically start executing the script files in sequence. The [Execute Batch Commands] item on the [System] menu becomes invalid, but [Stop Execute Batch Commands] becomes valid. You can click this menu to stop executing commands in batch.

2.1.11 Setting Printing Options

You might frequently need to print out the information displayed on the BAM. To do so, proceed as follows:

1) Select [System/Print Setup], and the print setup dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-24.

Figure 2-24 Setting printing options

2) Set the options according to your requirement. 3) Click <OK>.

2.1.12 Printing in Real Time

To print in real time, select [System/Realtime Print].

The system will not immediately print the real time alarm report until there is enough content to fill up a page.

If you want to print information in real time, remember to select [System/Flush Printer] after the system generates real time alarms.

2.1.13 Flushing Printer

To flush the printer, select [System/Flush Printer].

Page 51: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-20

If the buffer is empty, a blank page will be printed.

The printer will print all content in the buffer until it is empty.

2.1.14 Locking Client

You can lock the client to avoid access by unauthorized user when you are absent. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [System/Lock System], the system is locked, and a prompt appears as shown in Figure 2-25.

Figure 2-25 Enter your password after locking the client

2) Enter the correct password. 3) Click <OK>, and you returns to the client interface.

2.1.15 Automatically Locking Client

To avoid unauthorized user using the client when you are absent, you can also set a timeout duration after which the system will automatically lock the client. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [System/Auto Lock Setting], and the [Configure Auto Lock Setting] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-26.

Page 52: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-21

Figure 2-26 Configuring automatic locking settings

2) Select [Enable Lock]. 3) Specify the time after which the system locks the client. The valid range is 1–360. 4) Click <OK>.

For example, in Figure 2-26 the system will lock the client in 30 minutes.

2.1.16 Exiting

Select [System/Exit] to exit the client.

2.2 Using Service Menus

2.2.1 Starting Alarm Management System

There are two ways to start the alarm management system:

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Alarm Management System].

2) After logging on to the client, select [Service/Alarm Management System], as shown in Figure 2-27.

Figure 2-27 Starting the alarm management system from the client

Note:

Here we only introduce how to start the alarm management system. For its usage, refer to chapter 3 “Using Alarm Management System”.

Page 53: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-22

2.2.2 Starting Performance Management System

There are two ways to start the performance management system:

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Performance Management System].

2) After logging on to the client, select [Service/Performance Management System].

Note:

Here we only introduce how to start the performance management system. For its usage, refer to chapter 4 “Using Performance Management System”.

2.3 Using Authority Menus

2.3.1 Classification Operation Authorities

The SoftX3000 client assigns to users different levels of authorities—operator, workstation, and command group.

I. Operator

Each operator must have a valid account to log in the SoftX3000 client. The system has two default accounts—SoftX300 and Guest. The “SoftX3000” account has the highest authorities, and the “Guest” account has the lowest authorities. You can add new operator accounts according to the requirements. To ensure security to the system, each account must have an complicated enough password.

Note:

The system administrator accounts, including the “SoftX3000” account, are configured when you install the BAM software.

II. Operator Domain and Operator Group

You can use the following three commands to set operator domain and operator group:

Command Usage

ADD DOMAIN Define the domain in which the operator has certain level of authorities

ADD DOMAUTH Define the level of authorities in the operator domain, for instance, managing the telephone number in a certain range.

Page 54: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-23

Command Usage

ADD OPGRP Define the available operator group of the operator.

III. Workstation

A workstation is the computer that you log in to operate on. The BAM is also a workstation. You can only operate on an authorized workstation to maintain the SoftX3000. The intersection of the authorities of the workstation and the current login account is the actual authority you have.

IV. Command Group

You can also assign authorities to a workstation by command groups. This mode increases the efficiency of assigning authorities. You don't have to assign the authorities of commands one by one.

The system has already defined some command groups:

Subscriber management Ticket query GUEST SYS

You can modify and use all command groups except “SYS”. There are some empty command groups for you to customize.

Note:

You can only use the system administrator account to manage the authorities.

2.3.2 Adding Operator Account

Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Authority/Accounts/Add…] in the main client interface, and the [Accounts Management] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-28.

Page 55: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-24

Figure 2-28 Adding an operator account

2) Enter or select the authority attributes. 3) Click <OK>. You have completed adding an operator account.

I. Description of Parameters

The account is case-sensitive. You cannot leave it blank or create an existing account.

The start time and end time specifies the duration in which the operator has authority. The system administrator and GUEST operator are not limited by these two parameters. For common operators, if these two parameters are not defined, there is no duration limitation on authority.

The system administrator (using the G_SYS command group) enjoys the highest authorities, and can use all commands. The guest operator can only use the commands in the G_GUEST command group. The authorities of common operators are defined by operator group and operator domain.

Note:

You can also use the command ADD OP to add an operator account in the command window. After adding an account, you have to use SET OPTM to set the operation duration of the account.

2.3.3 Modifying Operator Account

Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Authority/Accounts/Modify…] in the main interface of the client, and the [Please Select Operator] dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 2-29.

Page 56: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-25

Figure 2-29 Selecting an account to modify

2) Select the account to be modified. 3) Click <OK>, and the [Accounts Management] dialog box appears as shown in

Figure 2-30.

Figure 2-30 Modifying an operator account

4) Modify the password, start time, end time, operator group, and operator domain. 5) Click <OK>, and the modification is completed.

Note:

In Figure 2-30, you cannot modify the operator name and operator description. You can also modify the start time and end time using the command SET OPTM.

Page 57: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-26

2.3.4 Deleting Operator Account

Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Authority/Accounts/Delete…] in the main interface of the client, and the [Please Select Operator] dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 2-29.

2) Select the account to be deleted. 3) Click <Delete>, and a confirmation dialog box appears as shown in Figure 2-31.

Figure 2-31 Confirming whether to delete the operator account

4) Click <Yes>, and the account is deleted.

Note:

You cannot delete the system administrator account “SoftX3000" or Guest. You can also use the command RMV OP to delete an operator account in the command window.

2.3.5 Adding Workstation

I. Operation Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Authority/Workstation/Add…] in the main client interface, and the [WS Management] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-32.

Page 58: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-27

Figure 2-32 Adding a workstation

2) Enter the workstation name and IP address. 3) Set the authority for the workstation. 4) Click <OK>.

If the operation is successful, the system will prompt whether to add another workstation. Otherwise, the system will prompt that the workstation already exists, or the IP address is incorrect.

II. Notes on Adding a Workstation

The workstation name is not case-sensitive. You cannot leave it blank or use the name of an existing workstation.

The IP address must be a valid one. Like the workstation name, you cannot use the IP address of an existing workstation.

If you do not set the workstation authority, by default it will have the lowest authority G_GUEST.

To ensure that a legal operator can log in the SoftX3000 client, you have to allocate an account and password by selecting [Authority/Accounts/Add…].

You can also use the command ADD WS to add a workstation in the command window.

2.3.6 Modifying Workstation

Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Authority/ Workstation /Modify…] in the main interface of the client, and the [Please Select WS] dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 2-33.

Page 59: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-28

Figure 2-33 Selecting a workstation to be modified

2) Select the workstation to be modified. 3) Click <OK>, and the [WS Management] dialog box appears as shown in Figure

2-34.

Figure 2-34 Modifying a workstation

4) Modify the name, IP address, and authority of the workstation. 5) Click <OK>, and the modification is completed.

2.3.7 Deleting Workstation

Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Authority/ Workstation /Delete…] in the main interface of the client, and the [Please Select WS] dialog box appears, as shown in Figure 2-33.

2) Select the workstation to be deleted. 3) Click <Delete>, and a confirmation dialog box appears as shown in Figure 2-35.

Page 60: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-29

Figure 2-35 Confirming whether to delete the workstation

4) Click <Yes>, and the workstation is deleted.

I. Notes on Deleting a Workstation

You can only delete a workstation when you log in as a system administrator. After deletion, all authorities granted to the workstation are also deleted.

You cannot delete the "super” workstation of BAM. If the workstation to be deleted is still in use, you have to reduce the authority of

the current login operator to G_GUEST before you can delete the workstation. You can also use the command RMV WS to delete a workstation in the command

window.

2.3.8 Setting Command Group

You can modify the commands in a certain command group only when you log in to the client as system administrator. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Authority/Command Group/Add…] in the main client interface, and the [Command Group Authority Setting] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-36.

Figure 2-36 Modifying a command group

2) Selecting a command group to be modified.

Page 61: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-30

3) Select the commands in the command group according to your requirement. 4) Click <OK>, and you have completed the customization of the command group.

Note:

You can also use the command ADD CCG to modify a command group in the command window. To remove and query a command group, use the command RMV CCG and LST CCG in the command

window.

2.4 Using View Menus

2.4.1 Overview of Using View Menus

The [View] menus help you show and hide the following items:

Navigation tree Output window Command window Alarm tab Performance tab Debug tab Tool bar Status bar

2.4.2 Showing or Hiding Windows

Proceed as follows:

1) In the [U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance System] window, select [View/ ”window name” (for example, Navigation Tree or Command Window)].

2) The selected window is displayed. Click this menu item again. The window is hidden.

Note:

By default, only the [Management] tab is displayed. After selecting “Alarm”, “Performance”, and “Debug”, the alarm tab, performance tab, and debug tab

are displayed in the output pane.

Page 62: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-31

2.4.3 Showing Tools and Status

The [View] menus help you show or hide the toolbar and the status bar. Proceed as follows:

1) In the [U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance System] window, click [Toolbar] or [Status bar] on the [View] menu.

2) The selected toolbar or status bar is displayed. Click this menu item again. The toolbar or status bar is hidden.

Note:

You can implement re-login, show/hide navigation tree, show/hide output window, show/hide command window, print in real time, and view online help information by selecting the corresponding item on the toolbar.

The status bar displays the workstation state. “Connected” means online. “Disconnected” means offline.

2.5 Using Window Menus The menus help you cascade and tile multiple windows, arrange icons, and close all windows.

2.5.1 Cascading Windows

To cascade multiple windows, select [Windows/Cascade] in the main interface of the client, as shown in Figure 2-37.

Page 63: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-32

Figure 2-37 Cascading windows

2.5.2 Tiling Windows Horizontally

To tile windows horizontally, select [Windows/Tile Horizontally] in the main interface of the client, as shown in Figure 2-38.

Page 64: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-33

Figure 2-38 Tiling windows horizontally

2.6 Using Help Menus You can obtain help information through the [Help] menu or the online help window.

2.6.1 Using SoftX3000 Online Book

The online book is a comprehensive online help of all components in the SoftX3000. To use it, proceed as follows:

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Online Book] on the BAM or client, and the online book is displayed as shown in Figure 2-39.

Page 65: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-34

Figure 2-39 [U-SYS SoftX3000 Online Book]

The left pane contains the following tabs:

Contents: It lists all online help items in the structure of the SoftX3000 operation and maintenance system.

Index: It provides index-based search function. All online help items are arranged in alphabetic order.

Search: It provides fuzzy-match search function. You can define search conditions by logical relationship.

Favorite: You can add bookmarks here to fast locate the frequently-used help information.

2) Select the search mode as needed for online help.

Page 66: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-35

2.6.2 Using Help Topics

Proceed as follows:

1) In the [U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance System] window, select [Help/Help Topics] or press the key <F1>. The client online help window is displayed as shown in Figure 2-40.

Figure 2-40 Starting online help through menu or toolbar

The left pane contains the following tabs:

Contents: It lists all online help items in the structure of the SoftX3000 operation and maintenance system.

Index: It provides index-based search function. All online help items are arranged in alphabetic order.

Search: It provides fuzzy-match search function. You can define search conditions by logical relationship.

Favorite: You can add bookmarks here to fast locate the frequently-used help information.

2) Select the search mode as needed for online help.

Page 67: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-36

Note:

You can also open the online help window as shown in Figure 2-40 by clicking on the toolbar. The

online help windows started through the menu or toolbar in the other interfaces all support query of operation-related help information.

2.6.3 Calling Online Help of Dialog Box

To see the online help of a certain dialog box, press <F1>. The online help of the dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-41.

Figure 2-41 Calling online help of dialog box

2.6.4 Calling Pop-Up Online Help

When you stop your cursor on a button or parameter input field, a square box will be displayed, indicating the function of the button, and the range of value and default value of the parameter. Figure 2-42 shows the details.

Page 68: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-37

Figure 2-42 Calling pop-up online help

2.6.5 Querying Version

To query version of the client software:

Select [Help/About], and the version information is displayed as shown in Figure 2-43.

Figure 2-43 Querying version

Page 69: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-38

2.7 Using Management Tab

2.7.1 Overview of Management Tab

The system management operations comprises two sections—device management and subscriber management. In the navigation tree of the client interface, click the [Management] pane, and the navigation tree is changed as shown in Figure 2-44.

Figure 2-44 Working on system management pane

The device management node includes the following sub-nodes:

Browsing device panel Displaying board information Resetting boards Swapping boards Querying CPU usage Querying memory usage

The subscriber management node is composed of two parts—subscriber configurations and common operations.

Subscriber configurations include:

Number segment configuration Centrex configuration Voice subscriber configuration BRA subscriber configuration V5 subscriber configuration Multimedia subscriber configuration

Common operations include:

Voice subscriber common operations V5 subscriber common operations

Page 70: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-39

Multimedia subscriber common operations

2.7.2 Browsing Device Panel

The device panel displays the board configuration in all slots of the current frame. Proceed as follows to browse the device panel:

1) Double click [Device Management] node in the management pane, and the device management window is displayed as shown in Figure 2-45.

Figure 2-45 Device management window

2) Double click the “shelf 0” to be queried, and a system panel diagram appears as shown in Figure 2-46, displaying the configuration of boards in the frame.

Page 71: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-40

Figure 2-46 Device panel

The color section in the middle of Figure 2-46 is board view. Here is an description of different colors:

Red means that the board has been configured with data, but is not working properly.

Green means that it is a normal active board. Blue means that it is a normal standby board.

The symbol indicates that the board has a pinch board (or sub-board). There

are two colors of the symbol: green means the pinch board is working normally, and gray means the pinch board is faulty.

The black bar at the bottom displays the status of boards. The information of faulty boards is also displayed, including slot number and board type (front board or back board).

Note:

When the board indicator is green or blue, the board is normal, but the service might not be normal yet.

Page 72: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-41

The [Single] pane on the right of Figure 2-46 can display and help you add, remove, and modify hardware configurations.

2.7.3 Displaying Board Information

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the board to be queried in the device panel, and a shortcut menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-47.

Figure 2-47 Shortcut menus

Note:

For the alarm board ALUI, you can only query and reset it. You can only swap the active board. You cannot see any shortcut menus when you right click the power board UPWR.

2) In Figure 2-47, select [Display Board] in the shortcut menu, and a dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-48. The dialog box specifies the name, status, physical memory, available memory, CPU usage, and many other information of the board.

Page 73: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-42

Figure 2-48 Displaying board information

2.7.4 Resetting Boards

I. Overview of Resetting Board

You have to reset a board when there is logical disorder during operation of the board, and that the board cannot work normally and has to be restored.

The reset operation is to send a hot-reboot command from the BAM. When all boards in a frame are faulty, or when the system crashes and you cannot reset the board by selecting the [Reset Board] option on the device panel, you have to unplug and plug the active and standby SMUIs to reset the frame.

II. Cautions of Resetting Board

You can only reset a board when it is faulty, or when the system crashes, or during major software upgrade.

The reset operation will affect the services provided by the board. Be cautious in your operation.

Never reset a board frequently.

Do not reset a board when it is normal.

To reset a board, reset the standby one first. Wait till it is running normally before you can reset the active one.

III. Operation Procedure

Proceed as follows:

Page 74: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-43

1) Right click the board to be reset in the device panel, and a shortcut menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-47.

2) Select the [Reset Board] option, and a confirmation dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-49.

Figure 2-49 Confirming to reset the board

3) Click <Yes>. The system starts to reset the board.

2.7.5 Swapping Boards

The swap operation is to exchange the role of an active board and its standby peer. Generally, you can swap an active board in the basic frame when its CPU usage or memory usage has been near 100% for a long time.

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the board to be swapped in the device panel, and a shortcut menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-47.

2) Select [Swap Board], and a confirmation dialog box will appear. 3) Click <Yes>. The system starts to swap the board.

Caution:

Do not swap a normal board. Be cautious when swapping a board.

2.7.6 Querying CPU Usage

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the board to be queried in the device panel, and a shortcut menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-47.

2) Select [Display CPU Usage], and the system will display the CPU usage of the board in real time, as shown in Figure 2-50.

Page 75: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-44

Figure 2-50 Displaying the CPU usage of a board

2.7.7 Querying Memory Usage

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the board to be queried in the device panel, and a shortcut menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 2-47.

2) Select [Display Memory Usage], and the system will display the memory usage of the board in real time, as shown in Figure 2-51.

Page 76: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-45

Figure 2-51 Displaying the memory usage of a board

2.7.8 Configuring Subscriber Data

In addition to configuring subscriber data in the command window, you can also configure subscriber data. Here, we take the configuration of voice subscriber as an example. Proceed as follows:

In Figure 2-44, double click the “Voice Subscriber Configuration” node, and the configuration window is displayed as shown in Figure 2-52.

Page 77: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-46

Figure 2-52 Configuring subscriber data

Table 2-2 Description of buttons in subscriber data configuration interface

Button Function

Filters the date to be displayed.

Cancels the filter operation.

Refreshes the display

Customizes the filter mode

The [Single] tab provides similar functions as the one on the device management interface. You can add, remove, modify, and query subscriber data in the tab.

Page 78: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-47

2.7.9 Maintaining Subscriber Data

In addition to maintaining subscriber data in the command window, you can also do it in the GUI. Here, we take the maintenance of voice subscriber as an example. Proceed as follows:

In Figure 2-44, double click the “Voice Subscriber Common Operations” node, and the configuration window is displayed. Execute the command List MGCP MGW, and the results are shown in Figure 2-53.

Figure 2-53 Common operation and maintenance interface

2.8 Using MML Navigation Tree

2.8.1 Overview of Using MML Navigation Tree

In the GUI, you can run commands to execute commands and query online help.

Double click the MML navigation tree, you will see three tabs containing the results and output of operations—Common Maintenance, History Command, and Help Information. Table 2-3 lists the functions of the tabs.

Table 2-3 Functions of tabs in the operation result pane

Tabs Functions

Common Maintenance Returns the execution results of commands from the BAM.

History Command Records all executed commands in the current login, including unsuccessful ones.

Help Information Displays the online help for commands and nodes in the navigation tree. Each help page includes the functions, notes, parameter description, and examples.

Page 79: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-48

2.8.2 Using Common Maintenance Pane

For instance, to query an office direction, proceed as follows:

1) Enter ADD MMTE in the command input box.

2) Press <Enter> or click , the parameters to be specified are also displayed, as

shown in Figure 2-54.

Figure 2-54 Specifying parameters

There are two types of parameters:

The red ones are compulsory, which must be specified. The black ones are optional, which can be specified or omitted.

To know the range of value of a specific parameter, stop the cursor at the input box and the system will display a pop-up help, indicating the function of the button, and the range of value and default value of the parameter. Figure 2-54 shows the details.

3) Specify the parameters according to your requirement.

4) Click the button or press <F9>, and the system starts executing the command. The [Common Maintenance] tab displays the results as shown in Figure 2-55.

Page 80: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-49

Figure 2-55 Using the [Common Maintenance] tab

2.8.3 Querying History Commands

The [History Command] tab records all executed commands in the current login, including unsuccessful ones.

At maximum, the system can store 1000 history commands. The default setting is 100 history commands. You can modify the number of history commands to be stored:

1) Click the [Common Maintenance] tab. 2) Right click in the [Common Maintenance] tab, and a shortcut menu is displayed as

shown in Figure 2-56.

Page 81: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-50

Figure 2-56 Shortcut menu in the [Common Maintenance] tab

3) Select [Setting], and the [MML Client Setting] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 2-57.

Figure 2-57 Setting client information

4) Set the maximum number of history commands. 5) Click <OK>.

Note:

When the number of executed commands exceeds the maximum number of history commands, the oldest records will be replaced by the new ones.

Press <F7> to select the previous command. Press <F8> to select the next command.

Page 82: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-51

2.8.4 Querying Online Help

After you enter a command in the command input box, if you want to see the online help of the command, click the [Help Information] tab or press <F1>. Figure 2-58 shows the details.

Figure 2-58 Querying online help of a command

An online help page contains four nodes:

Function Note Parameter ID Example

By default, only the contents of the Function node are displayed. To view the contents of other node, just click them.

2.9 Using Monitor Tab

2.9.1 Overview of Using Monitor Tab

The monitor tab consists of two parts—trace management and maintenance management. In the navigation tree of the client interface, click the [Monitor] pane, and the navigation tree is changed as shown in Figure 2-59.

Page 83: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-52

Figure 2-59 Using the trace and maintenance navigation tree

This chapter introduces the basic concepts in the Monitor tab. Refer to chapter 5 “Trace and Maintenance”.

2.9.2 Trace Management Tasks

Trace management is the real-time tracing and observation of the connection of the user circuit, trunk circuit, and interface signaling link in the following aspects:

Connection procedure State migration Resource usage Call party release procedure Code sending Control signaling flow

You can save the trace results for future reference. You can also print the trace results. The trace management feature is very helpful in the daily maintenance of the SoftX3000. It can help you quickly find the cause of failure and find a solution to the problem. It also provides you with detailed information of signaling and message coordination.

The trace management node includes two sub nodes—Interface Trace Task and User Trace Task.

Page 84: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 2 Using MML Client

2-53

2.9.3 Maintenance Management Tasks

The maintenance management tasks are management of the CPU, memory, signaling links, SS7 links, terminals, and modules.

2.10 Using the Toolbar The toolbar contains icons of frequently used operations. These icons provide the same functions as some of the menus. Table 2-4 lists the functions of the icons.

Table 2-4 Functions of icons in the toolbar

Icon Functions

Re-logs in the client.

Show/hide the navigation tree.

Shows/hides the system result pane.

Shows/hides the command window.

Shows/hides the wizard window.

Prints in real time.

Displays the online help.

Page 85: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-1

Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3.1 Overview of Alarm Management System The alarm management system helps you detect, isolate, and fix the faults and errors found in the SoftX3000.

You can observe and monitor the SoftX3000 by reading the alarms reported from the host. When a fault occurs in the SoftX3000, which might affect the service, the related module will generate an alarm, and the alarm management module in the BAM will display the content of the alarm. It can be a data transmission error, an operation fault, or an overload operation. You can then locate and remove the fault according to the alarm reported by the BAM.

The alarm management system provides the following functions and features:

Querying fault alarms and event alarms in real time Browsing fault alarms, recovery alarms, event alarms, and history alarms Querying alarms by search conditions Deleting history alarms Filtering alarms Masking alarms Querying alarm details by alarm number Configuring alarm box Querying alarm statistics by alarm box type and network management system Setting and querying alarm box masking level Setting colors for alarms of different levels

When you query alarms using the alarm management system, you have to know the alarm type and alarm level first.

3.2 Classification of Alarms

3.2.1 Classifying Alarms by Type

I. Overview of Alarm Types

The alarms can be classified into three types:

Fault alarm Event alarm Recovery alarm

Page 86: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-2

II. Fault Alarm

A fault alarm corresponds to a fault. It can be a circuit fault, signaling unreachable, link interruption, or board failure. It is displayed as a fault in the alarm report. When a fault is recovered, a recovery alarm will be generated accordingly.

III. Event Alarm

An event alarm describes an occasional and instant event during system operation. It has no corresponding recovery alarm. Some event alarms recur regularly. It can be a call connection or board loading.

IV. Recovery Alarm

Each recovery alarm has a corresponding fault alarm. It can be regarded as a part of the fault alarm.

3.2.2 Classifying Alarms by Level

I. Overview of Alarm Levels

There are four levels of alarms, classified by severity. Each identifies a different level of impact on service.

Critical Major Minor Warning

II. Critical Alarm

Critical alarms have already affected the quality of service, and require immediate actions even in non-duty hours. The equipment and network resource might be completely unavailable.

III. Major Alarm

Major alarms have already affected the quality of service, and require immediate actions. The quality of service and the service provisioning capability of the equipment are degraded, and must be restored during your duty hours.

IV. Minor Alarm

Minor alarms have not affected the quality of service, but require treatment in proper time or further observation to prevent graver faults and errors.

V. Warning Alarm

Warning alarms indicate potential errors that might affect the service.

Page 87: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-3

3.3 Generic Operations

3.3.1 Starting Alarm Management System

I. Overview of Starting Alaram Management System

There are two ways to start the alarm management system:

Start it from the windows [Start] menu Start it from the SoftX3000 client

II. Starting from Windows Start Menu

You can start the alarm management system from the windows [Start] menu. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance System/U-SYS SoftX3000 Alarm Management System], and the “Operator Login” dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-1.

Figure 3-1 Starting from windows start menu

2) Select in the drop-down list box "Office Name" the office to log in. 3) Enter the operator name and password. 4) Click <OK>. The system will start the alarm management system, as shown in

Figure 3-2.

Page 88: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-4

Figure 3-2 Main interface of alarm management system

III. Starting from SoftX3000 Client

After logging on to the client, you can start the alarm management system as follows: Select [Service/Alarm Management System], as shown in Figure 3-3.

Figure 3-3 Starting the alarm management system from the client

3.3.2 Customizing Alarm Colors

Different types of alarms are displayed in different colors. You can use the default settings or customize them. You can also set the initial alarm records and maximum alarm records to be displayed. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [System/System Customization], and the [System Customization] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-4.

Page 89: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-5

Figure 3-4 Customizing alarm display settings

2) Change the options according to your requirement.

If you want to see the recovery alarms, select [Display Recovery alarms].

3) Click <OK> to save the settings.

Note:

To restore the color settings to default, click <Restore default color value>.

3.4 Browsing Alarms After you log in to the alarm management system, you can see two windows. One lists fault alarms, and the other lists event alarms.

Page 90: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-6

3.4.1 Browsing Fault Alarms

The fault alarms can be faults occurred in the media gateway (MG), circuits, application servers, and so on. To browse fault alarm information, you have to start the [Fault browse] window first.

1) Select [Alarm Browse/Fault Alarm], and the [Fault browse] window is displayed as shown in Figure 3-5.

Figure 3-5 [Fault browse] window

2) Double click an alarm record, and the detailed information of the alarm is displayed, as shown in Figure 3-6.

Figure 3-6 Detailed alarm information

The [Alarm Explanation Details] window details the alarm serial number, alarm type, alarm level, source of alarm, alarm ID, network management type, alarm occurrence time, alarm cause, recovery advice, and so on.

Page 91: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-7

3) Click <REMARK>, and the remark dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3-7.

Figure 3-7 Adding remark

4) Enter the remark. 5) Click <Save>.

Note:

On the heading of the [Fault Browse] window, you can see the number of alarms of all levels.

3.4.2 Browsing Event Alarms

To browse event alarm information, you have to start the [Event browse] window first. Proceed as follows:

Select [Alarm Browse/Event Alarm], and the [Event browse] window is displayed as shown in Figure 3-8.

Figure 3-8 [Event browse] window

Page 92: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-8

3.4.3 Browsing History Alarms

To browse the history alarm, you have to start the [History browse] window first. Proceed as follows:

Select [Alarm Browse/History Alarm], and the [History browse] window is displayed as shown in Figure 3-9.

Figure 3-9 [History browse] window

3.4.4 Defining Alarm Filter Settings

You can set the alarm filter conditions to browse different types of alarms. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Alarm Browse/Alarm Filter Browse], and the [Alarm filter setting] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-10.

Figure 3-10 Defining alarm filter settings

2) Select the alarm type and alarm level to be displayed. 3) Specify the module number and network management type. 4) Click <OK>. The filtered alarm browse window will be displayed.

Page 93: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-9

3.4.5 Filtering Alarms of Malicious Calls and Emergency Calls

You can filter the information related to malicious calls and emergency calls from event alarms. Proceed as follows:

Select [Alarm Browse/ Malicious/Emergency Call Browse], and the [Malicious/emergency call browse] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-11.

Figure 3-11 Filtering alarms of malicious and emergency calls

3.5 Querying Alarms

3.5.1 Notes on Querying Alarms

At maximum, 1000 alarms can be queried at a time.

The module number ranges from 1 to 252. When you set the module number to 255, the alarm information of the BAM will be displayed.

The alarm number ranges from 1 to 5000.

The alarm ID is unique for each alarm. It represents a certain fault or event, the alarm level, and the network management type. The alarm ID can be used to obtain the alarm name, recovery advice, and alarm cause. The alarm ID of the recovery alarm is the alarm ID of the corresponding fault alarm plus one. The alarm IDs are usually segmented.

The start time must be earlier than or equal to the end time. The start date must be earlier than or equal to the end date.

3.5.2 Operation Procedure

You can query a certain type of alarm. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Alarm Query/Query], and the [Alarm Query Setting] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-12.

Page 94: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-10

Figure 3-12 Defining alarm query settings

If you need to specify the options other than alarm type, you have to select the corresponding check boxes first.

2) Specify the options and fields in the [Alarm Query Setting] dialog box. 3) Click <OK>, and the [Alarm query result] window is displayed as shown in Figure

3-13.

Figure 3-13 [Alarm query result] window

3.6 Alarm Management Operations

3.6.1 Deleting History Alarms

You can delete the unwanted alarm records of a certain period to release harddisk space. Proceed as follows:

Page 95: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-11

1) Select [Alarm Management/Delete Alarm], and the [Delete Alarm] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-14.

Figure 3-14 Deleting unwanted alarms of the certain period

2) Specify the [Start date] and [End date] of the alarms to be deleted. 3) Click <OK>.

Note:

The unrecovered fault alarms cannot be deleted. The [End date] is a mandatory parameter, while the [Start date] is optional. When the [Start date] is not specified, the system will delete one week of alarms by default. The start

date is one week earlier than the end date.

3.6.2 Masking Alarms

There can be a huge number of alarms reported at the host. When you just need to see certain types and more important levels of alarms than others, you can mask the unwanted alarms. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Alarm Management/Alarm Mask], and the alarm masking dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-15.

Page 96: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-12

Figure 3-15 Masking unwanted alarms from reporting

2) Define a mask setting. 3) Click <Add>.

When the [Alarm mask query] window exists, the mask setting list will be updated. The new alarm mask setting will be added.

You can also select and delete a mask setting. The setting will also be removed from the alarm mask query window.

To query the alarm mask settings, proceed as follows:

4) Enter the mask settings. 5) Click <Query>, and the [Alarm mask query result] window will be displayed as

shown in Figure 3-16.

Figure 3-16 [Alarm mask query result] window

Page 97: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-13

Note:

Alarm filtering and alarm masking are different. The former is to send a command to the BAM and prevent it from sending the masked alarms to the alarm management system. The latter is to prevent the filtered alarms to be displayed.

3.6.3 Querying Alarm Configurations

You can query the following configuration items:

Alarm ID Alarm name Send alarm flag Send alarm box flag Send network management flag Alarm level Network management alarm level Network management alarm type Alarm box alarm type

Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Alarm Management/Alarm Configuration Query], and the query alarm parameter dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-17.

Figure 3-17 Setting the alarm ID of the alarm to be queried

2) Select [Alarm ID]. 3) Enter the alarm ID to be queried. 4) Click <OK>, and the [Query Alarm Configuration] window is displayed as shown in

Figure 3-18.

Page 98: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-14

Figure 3-18 Query results of alarm parameters

Note:

If you directly click <OK> without selecting [Alarm ID], all alarm records will be displayed.

3.6.4 Defining Alarm Box Control Settings

You can define the alarm box control settings to control the alarm box. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Alarm Management/Alarmbox Control], and the alarm box control dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-19.

Figure 3-19 Defining alarm box control settings

2) Select the function in [Function operation].

Here, [Darken alarmbox status light] means to turn off the alarm box indicator. You also have to specify the alarm level.

3) Select the alarm level in the pull-down menu. 4) Click <OK> to update the settings.

3.6.5 Defining Alarm Statistics

The alarm statistics function is to measure the number of a specific type of alarm. Proceed as follows:

Page 99: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-15

1) Select [Alarm Management/Alarm Statistics], and the query alarm parameter dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-20.

Figure 3-20 Querying alarm statistics

2) Define [Alarm type] and [Alarm level]. 3) When you select and specify [Module No.], you can query the alarm statistics by

module number. 4) Select and specify [Alarm ID]. You can query the alarm statistics by alarm ID. 5) Select and specify start date, end date, start time, and end time. You can obtain

the alarm statistics of a certain period. 6) After specifying all options you need, click <OK> and the query result is displayed

as shown in Figure 3-21.

Page 100: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-16

Figure 3-21 Results of alarm statistics query

3.6.6 Defining Alarm Box Screen Level

You can define the alarm box screen level to prevent the BAM from sending the alarms of lower levels to the alarm box. For instance, if you set it to major, the BAM will not send minor and warning alarms to the alarm box. Proceed as follows to define the alarm box screen level:

1) Select [Alarm Management/Alarm Box Screen Level/Set], and the alarm box screen level dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-22.

Figure 3-22 Defining alarm box screen level

2) Select the alarm level. 3) Click <Apply> to update the settings.

Page 101: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-17

3.6.7 Querying Alarm Box Screen Level

Proceed as follows to query alarm box screen level:

Select [Alarm Management/Alarm Box Screen Level/Get], and the alarm box screen level is displayed as shown in Figure 3-23.

Figure 3-23 Querying alarm box screen level

3.6.8 Defining Sound Durations for Fault Alarms

You can define the sound duration of different levels of alarms. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [Alarm Management/Fault Alarm Sound], and the setting dialog box is displayed.

2) Select [Enable Alarm Sound]. 3) Define the sound durations of alarms, as shown in Figure 3-24.

Figure 3-24 Defining sound durations for fault alarms

4) Click <OK>.

Page 102: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-18

Note:

If no sound card is properly installed on the computer, you cannot hear the alarm sound. You have to select a certain level of alarm in the window before you can specify the alarm sound

duration.

3.7 Using Other Alarm Related Options

3.7.1 Overview of Other Alarm Related Options

There are some additional functions in the main interface of the alarm management system:

Using the shortcut menu Querying alarm explanation details Saving alarm content to file Acknowledging alarms Recovering alarms Clearing recovery alarms

3.7.2 Using Shortcut Menu

You can use the shortcut menu to stop scrolling, acknowledge alarms, clear part or all recovery alarms, save alarm information, and refresh the screen. Proceed as follows:

1) Right click in the [Fault browse] window or [History browse] window, and a shortcut menu of alarm-related operations is displayed as shown in Figure 3-25.

Figure 3-25 Shortcut menu in [Fault browse] window and [History browse] window

The shortcut menu in the [Event browse] window has fewer options, as shown in Figure 3-26.

Figure 3-26 Shortcut menu in [Event browse] window

Page 103: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-19

2) Save the information in text or excel format.

3.7.3 Querying Alarm Explanation Details

Proceed as follows:

1) Double click an alarm record, and the [Alarm Explanation Details] window will be displayed as shown in Figure 3-27.

Figure 3-27 Alarm explanation details of a fault alarm

2) Click <REMARK>, and the remark dialog box appears as shown in Figure 3-28.

Figure 3-28 Adding remarks in a fault alarm

3) Add remark for the alarm. 4) Click <Save> to save the remark.

Page 104: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-20

3.7.4 Saving Alarm Content to File

You can save the alarm content to files for future reference. There are two formats supported—text and excel. Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the alarm record to be save, and a shortcut menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 3-25.

2) Select the file format under “Save as”, and the save attributes to file dialog box will be displayed as shown in Figure 3-29.

Figure 3-29 Saving alarm content to file

3) Specify the path for the file. 4) Click <Save> to save the file.

3.7.5 Recovering an Alarm

I. Notes on Recovery Alarms

You have to select a fault alarm record, or the “Recover alarm” option is unavailable.

You can recover one or multiple alarms.

When you have defined different display colors for fault alarms and recovery alarms, the color of the alarm will be changed accordingly. The alarm type will be changed from Fault to Recovery. To clear it, select “Clear Part of Recovery Alarm”.

The change of color of the alarm record will be reflected in all windows that are displaying it.

II. Operation Procedure

You can use the option to recover a fault alarm in the GUI. Proceed as follows:

Page 105: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-21

1) Right-click an alarm to be recovered, and the shortcut menu is displayed as shown in Figure 3-30.

Figure 3-30 Recovering an alarm

2) Select “Recover Alarm”, and the alarm is recovered.

3.7.6 Acknowledging an Alarm

To acknowledge an alarm record, proceed as follows:

1) Right click the alarm record to be acknowledged, and the shortcut menu is displayed as shown in Figure 3-31.

Figure 3-31 Acknowledging an alarm

2) Select “Acknowledge Alarm”, and the alarm is acknowledged.

3.7.7 Clearing Recovery Alarms

You can clear some or all recovery alarms according to your need.

I. Clearing All Recovery Alarms

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click any alarm record, and the shortcut menu is displayed as shown in Figure 3-32.

Page 106: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-22

Figure 3-32 Clearing all recovery alarms

2) Select "Clear All Recovery Alarms”, and all recovery alarms are cleared.

Note:

There should be at least one recovery alarm, or the [Clear All Recovery Alarms] option is unavailable.

II. Clearing Selected Recovery Alarms

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the alarm records to be cleared, and the shortcut menu is displayed as shown in Figure 3-33.

Figure 3-33 Clearing selected recovery alarms

2) Select "Clear Part of Recovery Alarms”, and the selected recovery alarms are cleared.

Note:

There should be at least one recovery alarm, or this option is unavailable. When you have also selected fault alarms, they will not be cleared from the alarm management

system.

Page 107: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-23

3.8 Defining Print Options

3.8.1 Overview of Using Print Options

You might frequently need to print out the alarm information details. To do so, the system has multiple print options for your choice.

3.8.2 Defining Real Time Print Filter Settings

You can define the types and levels of alarms that you wish to print, and filter the rest. Proceed as follows:

1) Select [System/Realtime Print Filter Setting], and the real time printer filter setting dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 3-34.

Figure 3-34 Defining real time print filter settings

2) Select the alarm type, alarm level, and network management type. 3) Enter the module number. 4) Click <OK>.

3.8.3 Printing Alarm Details in Real Time

After defining the real time print filter settings, select [System/Realtime Print].

The system will not immediately print the real time alarm report until there is enough content to fill up a page.

If you want to print information in real time, remember to select [System/Flush Printer] after the system generates real time alarms.

3.8.4 Flushing the Printer

To flush the printer, select [System/Flush Printer].

Page 108: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System

3-24

If the buffer is empty, a blank page will be printed.

The printer will print all content in the buffer until it is empty.

Page 109: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-1

Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4.1 Overview of Performance Measurement Performance measurement is also known as payload measurement or traffic measurement.

It refers to various measuring activities carried out on the softswitch and the communication networks to obtain the following measurement data:

Running status Signaling information User information System resources

It provides reliable data reference for the following purposes:

Operation management Troubleshooting of equipment Network monitoring Network maintenance Network planning Network designing

4.2 Generic Operations

4.2.1 Workflow of Performance Measurement

You can implement performance measurement by applying tasks. Figure 4-1 lists the procedure of performance measurement. The boxes in broken lines are optional steps.

Page 110: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-2

Start

Analyze performance measurementdemand

Create performance measurement task

Start performance measurement task

Query performance measurement task

Modify performance measurement task

List performance measurement result

Deactivate performance measurementtask

Activate performance measurementtask

Performance measurement task ends

Delete performance measurement task

End

Figure 4-1 Operation procedure of performance measurement

You can implement the following tasks in the performance management system:

Creating a performance measurement task Modifying a performance measurement task Querying the details of a performance measurement task Query, save, and print performance measurement results Delete a performance measurement task

The first task is the most important one. All the rest are based on the created task.

4.2.2 Logging in to the Performance Management System

You can implement various performance measurement operations in either Graphical User Interface (GUI) or by Man Machine Language (MML).

Page 111: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-3

I. Operations in GUI

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Performance Management System]. The dialog box for setting office name and IP address is displayed.

2) Click <Set>. 3) Enter the office name and IP address. 4) Select the office to be measured in the login dialog box. 5) Enter the account and password. The main interface of the performance

management system is displayed as shown in Figure 4-2.

Figure 4-2 [U-SYS SoftX3000 Performance Management System] window

II. Operations by MML

You can execute a command at the client, for example, CRE TRFOTF, as shown in Figure 4-3.

Page 112: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-4

Figure 4-3 Interface for MML command input

The two modes have the same results.

The GUI mode is more obvious, and easy to understand and follow. This chapter will focus on operations in GUI mode only.

4.3 Cautions and Notes

4.3.1 Maximum Number of Tasks

Each performance measurement task occupies some system resources. The cases that too many tasks are carried out simultaneously or too frequently will lead to resource over-consumption, so a maximum of 128 tasks can be created.

4.3.2 User Authority

The performance measurement system divides user authorities into three levels: service query, service setting and service management. Refer to Table 4-1for the specific authorities of each level.

Page 113: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-5

Table 4-1 Table of user authorities

Operations Users with service query authority

Users with service setting authority

Users with service management authority

Creating a task Prohibited Allowed Allowed

Deleting a task or a result Prohibited Allowed for the user who

creates the task Allowed

Modifying the name of a task Prohibited Allowed for the user who

creates the task Allowed

Customizing a measurement entity Prohibited Prohibited Allowed

Querying a task and its result Allowed Allowed Allowed

4.3.3 Measurement entities

For any of extremum measurement entities of a measurement object, for example, measurement of CPU occupation rate, it cannot be created in multiple measurement tasks; otherwise, the measurement result will be inaccurate.

4.3.4 BAM time

The result output of a measurement task is closely related to the time. If the BAM time is modified, it is possible that the result exported within the next measurement period will be incorrect.

Page 114: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-6

4.4 Creating a Performance Measurement Task

4.4.1 General Workflow

Figure 4-4 tells the workflow of creating a task.

Select task type

Select measurement unit

Enter task name and description infomation

Customize entity or not? Customize entity

No

Yes

Select measurement entity

Select measurement object

Set measurement period, measurement time segment, and output period

Define entity thresholds

Define sampling parameters

Define report output mode

Optional

Start

End

Figure 4-4 Procedure of creating a performance measurement task

Suppose it is required to create a task for measuring the IAD traffic with the requirements below:

Measurement entities include call attempts, seizure times, call connected times, answer times, answer traffic, seizure traffic, connect traffic, and customized no answer times of IAD 0 and IAD1.

The measurement starts from Oct. 24, 2003 and lasts for 30 days. It is carried out for five minutes between 9:00–11:00, 14:00–16:00, and 19:00–21:00 from Monday to Friday.

When each measurement period ends, the report will be sent immediately to the workstation, performance measurement port, and network manager port.

Page 115: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-7

4.4.2 Customizing an Entity

I. Overview of Customizing an Entity

You can customize entities to meet the actual need of performance measurement. Figure 4-5 shows the procedure of customizing an entity.

Select [Define]

Enter entity alias

Select measurementunit

Redefine originalentity or not

No

Yes

Select entity unit

Select entity type

Select entity

Determine calculationformula

Enter entity name

Select [Redefine]

Select entity whosecalculation formula is

to be modified

Figure 4-5 Procedure of customizing an entity

II. Opening [Set Custom Entity] Dialog Box

Proceed as follows:

Select [Entity/Set Custom Entity] in the main interface as shown in Figure 4-2. The [Set Custom Entity] dialog box as shown in Figure 4-6 is displayed.

Page 116: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-8

Figure 4-6 [Set Custom Entity] dialog box

III. Selecting a Measurement Unit

The measurement unit for the “IAD traffic” task is “MGW Traffic”. Therefore, select “MGW Traffic” for [Measure Unit].

IV. Setting Calculation Formula for a Custom Entity

You can modify or set the calculation formula of either an original entity or a custom entity.

Table 4-2 shows the procedure of setting calculation formula for a custom entity.

Table 4-2 Procedure of setting calculation formula for a custom entity

Step Operations Parameter description

1 Select [Define].

2 (1) Enter alias and name of the custom entity. (2) Select entity unit and entity type.

The length of entity alias cannot be more than nine characters. The entity unit can be millisecond, percentage, byte, or no unit. The entity type can be Integer, Float, Time, and BCD Code.

3 Select an original entity. The entity is determined by the unit.

Page 117: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-9

Step Operations Parameter description

4 Click a button in and then select another original entity or a value to determine the calculation formula for the custom entity, as shown in Figure 4-7.

NA

5

Click <OK>. The [Operation Succeeded] prompt is displayed. The [Entity list] will have a “MGW No Answer Times” icon listed.

Here, MGW No Answer Times = Call Connected Times – Answer Times.

Figure 4-7 Example of setting calculation formula for a custom entity

Note:

After step 4, if you need to modify the calculation formula of the custom entity, you can delete the calculation formula in the above dialog box directly and define a new one.

To modify a determined calculation formula of an entity, you can right click the entity icon in the entity field in Figure 4-2 and then select [Modify Custom Entity…] on the shortcut menu.

Page 118: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-10

V. Modifying Calculation Formula of an Original Entity

Table 4-3 lists the operation procedure of modifying calculation formula of an original entity.

Table 4-3 Procedure of modifying calculation formula of an original entity

Step Operations Parameter description

1 Delete the existing calculation formula. NA

2 Select an original entity. The entity is determined by the unit.

3 Click a button in and then select another original entity to set the calculation formula.

NA

4 Click <OK>. The [Operation Succeeded] prompt is displayed. NA

4.4.3 Launching the Task Creation Interface

There are three ways to launch the task creation interface inFigure 4-2

Right click the “Task List(All)” icon and select [Create Task…] on the displayed shortcut menu.

Select [Task/Create Task…] in the main interface. Press the shortcut keys <Ctrl+N>.

The [Create a New Task] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 4-8.

Page 119: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-11

Figure 4-8 [Create a New Task] dialog box

4.4.4 Defining Task Attributes

I. Specifying Task Name and Description

The task name must be concise and the description should reveal the task purposes. It can be a maximum of 32 characters including letters, digits, and symbols (no space allowed).

Here, the task name is “IADAnswerRate” and the task description is "IAD Answer Rate”.

II. Selecting Task Type

Each measurement entity is subject to the related measurement function type and measurement type. For a measurement task, you can only select the entities subject to the same measurement function type as the task. That is, all measurement entities of a

Page 120: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-12

task must belong to one or more measurement types of the same measurement function type.

The measurement unit for the task “IAD Traffic” is “MGW Traffic”. Because “MGW Traffic” is a bearer task, select “Bear Traffic” for [Traffic task type] in Figure 4-8.

4.4.5 Selecting a Measurement Unit

Select “MGW Traffic” for [Measurement Unit] in Figure 4-8.

4.4.6 Selecting Measurement Entities

Caution:

If it is necessary to customize an entity, refer to 4.4.2.

Proceed as follows to select measurement entities:

1) Select the task type and measurement unit. 2) Click the [Entity] tab in Figure 4-8. The [Entity] tab page is displayed, as shown in

Figure 4-9.

Page 121: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-13

Figure 4-9 [Entity] tab page

Note:

If there is any custom entity, it will be shown in the [Available custom entities] field. The selection of a custom entity is in the same way as that of an original (static) entity.

3) Select the entities as needed, as shown in Figure 4-10.

Table 4-4 explains the fields and buttons in the [Entity] tab page.

Page 122: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-14

Table 4-4 Meaning of the fields and buttons in the [Entity] tab page

Field or button Function

Available static entities It lists the original measurement entities defined in the system.

Selected static entities It lists the selected entities, indicating data should be collected for them.

It is used to add the measurement entities selected from the [Available static entities] field to the [Selected static entities] field.

Caution: It is disabled unless you select a measurement entity from the [Available static entities] field.

It is used to delete a selected measurement entity from the [Selected static entities] field.

Caution: It is disabled unless you select a measurement entity from the [Selected static entities] field.

It is used to add all the measurement entities listed in the [Available static entities] field to the [Selected static entities] field.

It is used to delete all the measurement entities from the [Selected static entities] field.

It is disabled in creating a measurement task, but enabled when you modify properties of a task.

Here, measurement entities include call attempts, seizure times, call connected times, answer times, answer traffic, seizure traffic, connect traffic, and customized no answer times.

Page 123: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-15

Figure 4-10 Selected entities

Note:

The custom entity “MGW No Answered Times” is also selected.

4.4.7 Selecting a Measurement Object

Proceed as follows to select a measurement object:

Page 124: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-16

1) Click the [Object] tab in Figure 4-8. The [Object] tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-11.

2) Select “Certain MGW EID” for object type. 3) Enter the ID (that is, iad88.com) of IAD 1 in the [Certain MGW EID] field. You can

query MGW EID using LST MGW. 4) Click <Add Object Instance> to add the selected measurement object into the list,

as shown in Figure 4-11.

Figure 4-11 [Object] tab page

Page 125: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-17

Note:

You can select multiple measurement objects for one measurement task. However, you can only enter one object when entering the measurement entity.

4.4.8 Setting Time Properties

Proceed as follows to set time properties:

1) Click the [Time] tab in Figure 4-8. The [Time] tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-12.

Figure 4-12 [Time] tab page

Page 126: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-18

Table 4-5 explains the fields and buttons in the [Time] tab page.

Table 4-5 Meaning of the fields and buttons in the [Time] tab page

Field or button Meaning Value range Remarks

Start Date It is used to specify the date when a measurement task is started.

Any valid date. It is in the format of Year-Month-Day, for example, 2003-10-23.

It is recommended to enter the current date.

Statistics Duration

It is used to specify the duration of a measurement task.

1-1024 days Select it as needed. If “Statistics Duration” is not checked, the measurement task will be carried out permanently.

Measure Period It is used to specify the interval for exporting a measurement result.

It can be one minute, five minutes, ten minutes, fifteen minutes, thirty minutes, one hour, or one day.

By default, it is set to 15 minutes. Generally, it is recommended to set it to 30 minutes or 1 hour.

Measure Date(s) It is used to specify the date for measurement.

Measure Every Day: The measurement is carried out every day. Measure Date(s) Every Week: You can select several days for measurement from the list box.Measure Date(s) Every Month: You can select several days in a month for measurement from the list box.

Select it as needed.

Measure Time It is used to specify the time segment(s) in a day for measurement.

1–3 Select it as needed.

It is used to set which time segment is effective.

Three positions It can be dragged upward or downward.

Start Time1 It is used to specify the start time of the first time segment.

00:00–24:00 Set the most concerned time segment.

Start Time2 It is used to specify the start time of the second time segment.

00:00–24:00 It cannot be overlapped with the first time segment.

Start Time3 It is used to specify the start time of the third time segment.

00:00–24:00 It cannot be overlapped with the first and second time segments.

Page 127: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-19

2) Here, set [Start Date] to “2004-10-29”, [Statistics Duration] to “30” days, [Measure Date(s)] to “from Monday to Friday”, [Measure Time Segment] to “11:00–13:00”, “14:00–16:00”, and “19:00–21:00”, and [Measure Period] to “5” minutes.

4.4.9 Defining Entity Thresholds

Proceed as follows to define entity thresholds:

1) Click the [Threshold] tab in Figure 4-8. The [Threshold] tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-13.

You can define upper and lower thresholds for a maximum of four entities. Set the upper and lower thresholds as needed. If only the upper threshold of an entity is concerned, you can set the lower threshold to “0”. Likewise, if only the lower threshold is concerned, set the upper threshold to “0”.

Caution:

Not all measurement entities have thresholds, but only those with threshold property can be set with thresholds. In this example, the measurement entities have no threshold.

Page 128: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-20

Figure 4-13 [Threshold] tab page

Table 4-6 explains the fields in the [Threshold] tab page.

Table 4-6 Meaning of the fields in the [Threshold] tab page

Field Meaning

Entity Threshold List It lists the entities which can be set with threshold.

Lower Threshold It is used to set the lower threshold of an entity.

Upper Threshold It is used to set the upper threshold of an entity.

Set Threshold By clicking this button, you can validate the upper and lower thresholds that have been set.

Page 129: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-21

Field Meaning

List of Thresholds which have been set It lists the information of the entities whose thresholds have been set.

Delete Threshold After selecting an entity record in the [List of Thresholds which have been set], you can click this button to delete the thresholds of this entity.

4.4.10 Defining Sampling Parameters and Report Output Mode

Proceed as follows to define sampling parameters and report output mode:

1) Click the [Other] tab in Figure 4-8. The [Other] tab page is displayed, as shown in Figure 4-14.

Page 130: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-22

Figure 4-14 [Other] tab page

Table 4-7 explains the fields in the [Other] tab page.

Table 4-7 Meaning of the fields in the [Other] tab page

Field Meaning

Sampling Parameter Some measurement units generate two much information, so sampling measurement is necessary to keep accuracy and reduce system burden to some extent. The default sampling rate is 100%. Note that not every measurement unit has sampling parameters.

Page 131: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-23

Field Meaning

Output Device

It is used to set the destination where a measurement report will be sent. There are three options: Current Workstation Traffic Statistic Port Network Manager Port

Output Arrangement

It is used to define the time when a measurement report will be exported. There are three options: PerPeriod Output: When a measurement period ends, the report will be exported immediately. Specific Output: The report will be exported at specified time. Over Threshold Output: A report will be exported only when the measurement result is beyond the threshold range.

Here, when a measurement period ends, the system will immediately send a measurement report to the current workstation, traffic statistic port, and network manager port.

2) After setting all the parameters, click <OK>.

If the task is created successfully, an icon will appear under the [Task List (all)] node, as shown in Figure 4-15.

Figure 4-15 Interface showing successful creation of the task

4.4.11 Measurement Task State

There are seven states for a measurement task. In Figure 4-15, “IADAnswerRate (Running)” indicates that the task is running currently. Table 4-8 explains various states of a measurement task.

Table 4-8 Meaning of various states of a measurement task

State Meaning

Running tasks It indicates that a task is running currently.

Error tasks It indicates that a task is wrongly set.

Page 132: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-24

State Meaning

Ended tasks It indicates that a task has ended.

Deactivated tasks It indicates that a task has been deactivated.

No objected instance tasks It indicates that a task has no measurement object.

Setup tasks It indicates that a task has been created successfully, but the start time has not arrived yet.

Undefined tasks It indicates that a task fails to be created in the host. When a task is deactivated, it is deleted from the host, and its state will be displayed as “Undefined”.

4.5 Querying or Dumping Results of a Measurement Task

4.5.1 Querying Results of a Measurement Task

I. Opening [Query Task Result] Dialog Box

In the [U-SYS SoftX3000 Performance Management System] window as shown inFigure 4-2, right click a task under the [Task List(All)] node and then select [Query Task Result…] on the shortcut menu. A dialog box as shown in Figure 4-16 appears.

Figure 4-16 [Query Task Result] dialog box

Table 4-9 explains the fields in the [Query Task Result] dialog box.

Page 133: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-25

Table 4-9 Meaning of the fields in the [Query Task Result] dialog box

Field Meaning

Entity Style

Original: Only the results of the original measurement entities will be displayed. Evolve: The results of the original measurement entities including those whose calculation formulas have been modified will be displayed. Brief: The results of the original measurement entities and custom measurement entities will be displayed. Detailed: The results of all measurement entities (including original measurement entities, original measurement entities whose calculation formulas have been modified, and custom measurement entities) will be displayed.

Report Type

Normal: The default report type of the system. Sum by Period: The measurement result of each entity equals the total value of all entities of the same type within the period. Sum by Object: The measurement result of each entity equals the total value of all entities of the same type for different measurement objects. Sum by Period and Object: The measurement result of each entity equals the total value of all entities of the same type for different measurement objects within the measurement period. Threshold Overflow: Only the measurement results of the entities that exceed the threshold range will be displayed.

Time Type

Continuous: The system will export results generated from a time point of the start date to a time point of the end date. For instance, set the start date to 2004-03-01 (March 1, 2004), end date to 2004-03-03 (March 3, 2004), start time to 10:00, and end time to 15:00. Segment: The system will export results generated from the start time to the end time of each day between the start date and the end date. For the same settings as above, the system will export the measurement reports from 10:00 to 15:00 on March 1, 2 and 3. If neither “Continuous” nor “Segment” is selected, only the result exported when the previous period ends will be displayed.

Start Date It is used to set the date when a measurement task starts.

Start Time It is used to set the time when a measurement task starts.

End Date It is used to set the date when a measurement task ends.

End Time It is used to set the time when a measurement task ends.

II. Displaying Measurement Results

Proceed as follows to display measurement results:

Suppose it is required to display the normal reports for the original measurement entities from 00:00 of 2004/11/22 to 23:59 of 2004/11/29.

1) Click <Query>. The measurement results are as shown in Figure 4-17.

Page 134: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-26

Figure 4-17 Interface showing measurement results

There are three tab pages in the right pane of Figure 4-17: [Result List], [Detailed Information], and [Graphics Display].

[Result List] lists such information as object name, measurement unit, measurement time, and entity value in a table.

Caution:

If it is required to display the measurement results of the entities of a specific type only, you need to select an entity style in Figure 4-16.

2) Right click a record to display the shortcut menu as shown in Figure 4-18.

Page 135: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-27

Figure 4-18 Shortcut menu in the [Result List] tab page

Select the corresponding item on the shortcut menu to carry out such operations as refreshing results, printing results, saving results as Excel file, sorting results by time, and sorting results by entity.

3) Click <Detailed Information> tab to display the tab page as shown in Figure 4-18.

Figure 4-19 [Detailed Information] tab page

This page lists the results exported at the end of a measurement period for a measurement object, including entity name, entity value, and entity unit.

Page 136: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-28

Caution:

If it is required to display the measurement results of the entities of a specific type only, you need to select an entity style in Figure 4-16.

By clicking , you can browse the measurement results of different objects or exported at the end of different periods. To select different objects, click or . To select different periods, click .

4) Click <Graphics Display> tab to display the tab page as shown in Figure 4-20.

This page displays the measurement results vividly in data chart.

Figure 4-20 [Graphics Display] tab page

Table 4-10 explains the fields and buttons in the [Graphics Display] tab page.

Table 4-10 Meaning of the fields and buttons in the [Graphics Display] tab page

Field Meaning

Specific Object The chart is displayed based on specific measurement object.

Specific Time The chart is displayed based on specific measurement time.

It is used to display the previous result chart based on specified object and time.

Page 137: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-29

Field Meaning

It is used to display the next result chart based on specified object and time.

There are three options for graphics display: Histogram chart Folded line chart Pie chart

It is used to set the color for specific entity value.

4.5.2 Dumping Results of a Measurement Task

Proceed as follows to dump measurement task results:

1) Open [Dump Task Result] dialog box.

There are two ways:

Right click the icon of the task to be deactivated, and then select [Dump Task Result] on the shortcut menu.

Click [Dump Task Result] on the [Task] menu in the main interface. 2) Set time type, date, and time for backup. After confirmation, the measurement

results will be dumped in a file named as RST_???.DBF in the directory D:\Stats on the BAM (??? Stands for task name).

4.6 Querying the Details of a Measurement Task To query information of a measurement task, double click the task icon in the navigation tree. Various information of a task will be shown as in Figure 4-21.

Page 138: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-30

Figure 4-21 Interface showing detailed information of a task

There are three tabs in the [Task Information] pane, which are described in Table 4-11.

Table 4-11 Functions of tabs in the [Task Information] pane

Tab name Function

Basic Information It lists such information as the name, description, measurement unit, measurement period, output device, number of time segment, and duration days of a task.

Entity Information It lists the names of original entities, custom entities, and original entities whose calculation formulas have been modified of a task.

Object Information It lists the names of measurement objects of a task.

Page 139: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-31

4.7 Modifying Configuration Information of a Measurement Task

4.7.1 Overview of Modifying Task Configuration

You can modify the configuration information of a task by right clicking a task icon and then selecting the corresponding item on the shortcut menu, or by clicking the corresponding item on the [Task] menu in the main interface.

Modifying task name Modifying task output mode Modifying measurement entities Modifying time information Modifying sampling parameters Modifying measurement entity thresholds Deleting measurement entity thresholds Adding measurement object Deleting measurement object

During the modification, you can restore the original setting by clicking <Reset> in the lower left corner of the dialog box.

Note:

When modifying the information of a measurement task, you can view both the original measurement results and the new results after the modification in one table.

4.7.2 Modifying Task Name

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click a task icon. 2) Select [Modify Task Name] on the shortcut menu. 3) Modify the name of the task in the pop up dialog box. 4) Click <OK>.

Do not modify the task description.

4.7.3 Modifying Task Output Mode

I. Operation Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click a task icon. 2) Select [Modify Task Output Mode] on the shortcut menu.

Page 140: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-32

3) Modify the task output mode, that is, when to export the report. 4) Click <OK>.

II. Description of Options

PerPeriod Output When a measurement period ends, the report will be exported immediately.

Specific Output The report will be exported at specified time.

Over Threshold Output A report will be exported only when the measurement result is beyond the threshold range.

4.7.4 Modifying Report Output Device

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click a task icon. 2) Select [Modify Output Device] on the shortcut menu 3) Modify the report output device of the task in the pop up dialog box. 4) Click <OK>.

4.7.5 Modifying Measurement Entities

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click a task icon. 2) Select [Modify Measurement Entities] on the shortcut menu. 3) Modify the measurement entities of the task in the pop up dialog box. 4) Click <OK>.

4.7.6 Modifying Time Information

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click a task icon. 2) Select [Modify Time Info ] on the shortcut menu. 3) Modify the time information of the task in the pop up dialog box. 4) Click <OK>.

4.7.7 Modifying Sampling Parameters

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click a task icon. 2) Select [Modify Sampling Parameter] on the shortcut menu. 3) Modify the sampling parameters in the pop up dialog box. 4) Click <OK>.

Page 141: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-33

4.7.8 Modifying Measurement Entity Thresholds

I. Operation Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click a task icon. 2) Select [Set Task Threshold] on the shortcut menu. 3) Select the entity to be modified in the pop up dialog box. 4) Enter the upper and lower thresholds. 5) Click <Set Threshold>. 6) Click <OK>.

For a task, you can set the thresholds of a maximum of four entities.

After the setting of four entities, the button <Set Threshold> becomes unavailable. To modify the thresholds of a fifth entity, proceed as follows:

7) Right click the task icon 8) Select [Delete Task Threshold] on the shortcut menu to delete the thresholds of an

entity. 9) Select [Set Task Threshold] on the shortcut menu to add the thresholds for the fifth

entity.

4.7.9 Deleting Measurement Entity Thresholds

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the task icon 2) Select [Delete Task Threshold] on the shortcut menu. 3) Select the entity to be deleted in the pop up dialog box. 4) Click <Delete Threshold>. 5) In the dialog box for confirmation, click <OK>.

4.7.10 Adding Measurement Object

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the task icon 2) Select [Add Measurement Object Instance] on the shortcut menu. 3) Click <Select Object Data> in the pop up dialog box. 4) Select the measurement object to be added. 5) Click <OK>.

4.7.11 Deleting Measurement Object

Proceed as follows:

1) Right click the task icon 2) Select [Delete Measurement Object Instance] on the shortcut menu.

Page 142: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 4 Using Performance Management System

4-34

3) Select the object to be deleted. 4) Click <Delete Object Instance>. 5) In the dialog box for confirmation, click <OK>.

You cannot delete the last object.

4.8 Deleting a Performance Measurement Task There are two ways:

Right click the icon of the task to be deleted, and then select [Delete Task] on the shortcut menu.

Click [Delete Task] on the [Task] menu in the main interface.

4.9 Activating and Deactivating a Measurement Task

4.9.1 Overview

When a measurement task is running, you can stop it temporarily by deactivating it, and you can re-activate it when needed. In the navigation tree, if a task is headed with an

icon , it indicates that the task is running currently. If the icon is shown, it

indicates that the task has been deactivated.

4.9.2 Deactivating a Task

There are two ways:

Right click the icon of the task to be deactivated, and then select [Deactivate Task] on the shortcut menu.

Click [Deactivate Task] on the [Task] menu in the main interface.

4.9.3 Activating a Task

There are two ways:

Right click the icon of the task to be activated, and then select [Activate Task] on the shortcut menu.

Click [Activate Task] on the [Task] menu in the main interface.

4.10 Setting Clear Time of a Measurement Task Proceed as follows to set the clear time of a task:

1) Right click the icon of the task and then select [Set Clear Time] on the shortcut menu, or click [Set Clear Time] on the [Task] menu in the main interface. A dialog box for setting the clear time appears.

2) Enter the desired time and click <OK>.

Page 143: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-1

Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5.1 Trace and Maintenance Navigation Tree The navigation tree consists of two parts—trace management and maintenance management. In the navigation tree of the client interface, click the [Monitor] pane, and the trace and maintenance navigation tree is displayed as shown in Figure 5-1.

Figure 5-1 Trace and maintenance navigation tree

Trace management is the real-time tracing and observation of the connection of the user circuit, trunk circuit, and interface signaling link in the following aspects:

Connection procedure State migration Resource usage Call party release procedure Coding sending Control signaling flow

You can save the trace results for future reference. You can also print the trace results. The trace management feature is very helpful in the daily maintenance of the SoftX3000. It can help you quickly find the cause of failure and find a solution to the problem. It also provides you detailed information of signaling and message coordination.

Page 144: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-2

The trace management node includes two subnodes—Interface Trace Task and User Trace Task.

5.2 Interface Trace Tasks

5.2.1 Overview of Interface Trace Tasks

Expand the “interface trace task” node, and the type of interfaces that can be traced are shown in Figure 5-2.

Figure 5-2 Navigation tree of interface trace task

The following details the operation procedure of different interface trace tasks

Page 145: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-3

Caution:

Do not trace for long durations. Do not trace during heavy traffic.

5.2.2 Tracing Using Ping

I. Overview of Tracing Using Ping

It is used to verify whether the connection between IFMI and the device of destination IP address is normal. It is the same as the PING command in command input window.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “Ping” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [Ping Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-3.

Figure 5-3 Defining ping trace parameters

Table 5-1 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-2.

Table 5-1 Description of Ping trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number IFMI module number (mandatory parameter) The IFMI module number

defined in the system NA

Destination IP address Mandatory parameter Any valid IP address NA

Page 146: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-4

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Ping count Number of packets sent by the ping command 0–5000 4

Ping data size The ICMP response packet size (in bytes) 20–4096 56

Ping time out

The ICMP response timeout duration (in millisecond) 0–30000 2000

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the ping results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-4 shows the ping results of a normal connection. ICMP is disabled in the connection network.

Figure 5-4 Ping result display window

Figure 5-4 lists the sequence number, packet size, time delay of the reply message, and ping statistics, including packet sent, received, and lost.

Note:

Refer to RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol for detailed descriptions of ICMP.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-4, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

Page 147: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-5

5.2.3 Tracing with Trace Route

I. Overview of Tracing Using Trace Route

The tracing with trace route detects the route connection from the IFMI to the destination IP address.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “Trace Route” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [Trace Route] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-5.

Figure 5-5 Defining Trace Route trace parameters

Table 5-2 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-5.

Table 5-2 Description of Tracert trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number IFMI module number (mandatory parameter)

The IFMI module number defined in the system

NA

Page 148: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-6

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Destination IP address Mandatory parameter Any valid IP address NA

Probe count Probe count of each time to live (TTL) value 0–10 3

Trace max hops Size of ping packet (in bytes) 0–50 30

Trace route time out Ping timeout duration (in milliseconds) 0–30000 2000

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the Tracert results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-6 lists a typical example of Tracert trace results.

Figure 5-6 Tracert result display window

Figure 5-6 displays the return time from each router and each hop.

Note:

Tracert determines the path to the destination by sending the ICMP response request with the increased TTL value. Refer to RFC 792 Internet Control Message Protocol for detailed descriptions of ICMP.

Page 149: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-7

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-6, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.4 Tracing MGCP Messages

I. Overview of Tracing MRC Messages

This node helps you trace the MGCP messages in the SoftX3000 or between a softswitch and a media gateway.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “MGCP” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [MGCP Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-7.

Page 150: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-8

Figure 5-7 Defining MGCP message trace parameters

Table 5-3 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-7.

Table 5-3 Description of MGCP message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Trace specific equipment ID

When not selected, messages of all equipment IDs will be traced. Selected/Not selected Selected

Page 151: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-9

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Equipment ID Must be specified when [Trace specific equipment ID] is selected.

A valid device ID string. For instance, iad108.1b01.com.

NA

Termination ID It is the port number corresponding to the telephone number in the media gateway. It must be specified when [Trace specific equipment ID] is selected.

0–99999999 NA

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the MGCP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-8lists a typical example of MGCP trace results.

Page 152: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-10

Figure 5-8 MGCP trace result display window

Figure 5-8 lists the MGCP message sent between the SoftX3000 and the media gateway. Double click any message, and the content is displayed. For instance, double click the second NTFY message, and a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-9. It displays the content of the NTFY message, including the called number 2803102 sent from the media gateway.

Page 153: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-11

Figure 5-9 MGCP message content

Note:

For detailed description of MGCP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-8, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.5 Tracing H.248 Messages

I. Overview of Tracing MRC Messages

This node helps you trace the H.248 messages in the SoftX3000 or between a softswitch and a media gateway.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “H248” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [H248 Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-10.

Page 154: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-12

Figure 5-10 Defining H.248 message trace parameters

Table 5-4 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-10.

Table 5-4 Description of H.248 message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Specific equipment ID

When not selected, messages of all equipment IDs will be traced. Selected/Not selected Selected

Equipment ID

Must be specified when [Trace specific equipment ID] is selected.

A valid device ID string. For instance, 2.22.42.110:2944.

NA

Page 155: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-13

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Termination ID

It is the port number corresponding to the telephone number in the media gateway. It must be specified when [Trace specific equipment ID] is selected.

0–99999999 NA

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the H.248 message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-11 lists a typical example of H.248 trace results.

Figure 5-11 H.248 trace result display window

Page 156: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-14

Figure 5-11 lists the H.248 message sent between the SoftX3000 and the media gateway. Double click any message, and the content is displayed. For instance, double click the second NTFY_REQ message, and a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-11. It displays the content of the NTFY_REQ message, including the called number 2803102 sent from the media gateway.

Figure 5-12 H.248 message content

Note:

For detailed description of H.248, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-11, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

Page 157: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-15

5.2.6 Tracing MRC Messages

I. Overview of Tracing MRC Messages

This node helps you trace the message interaction process between the MRCI board in the SoftX3000 and a media gateway.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “MRC” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [MRC Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-13.

Figure 5-13 Defining MRC message trace parameters

Table 5-5describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-13.

Table 5-5 Description of MRC message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of

value Default value

Remote IP address IP address of gateway, mandatory parameter. Any valid IP

address NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Page 158: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-16

Parameter name Parameter description Range of

value Default value

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the message interaction process between MRC and gateway is displayed in the trace result window. For example, if a number dialed by a subscriber in the gateway with the IP address of 2.29.200.191 is an unallocated number, the MRC trace result is shown in Figure 5-14

Figure 5-14 MRC trace result display window

Figure 5-14 shows the response messages of the MRCI board, such as messages for establishing a link (CRCX), opening a channel, and playing an announcement. Among the messages, the request notification message RQNT contains the voice file name, that is, “HWF001000B.chi” in the fifth message in Figure 5-4.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-4, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.7 Tracing SIP Messages

I. Overview of Tracing SIP Messages

This node helps you trace the SIP messages in the SoftX3000 or between a softswitch and a device.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “SIP” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [SIP Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-15.

Page 159: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-17

Figure 5-15 Defining SIP message trace parameters

Table 5-6 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-15.

Table 5-6 Description of SIP message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

IP address IP address of a SIP device that is to be traced and is connected to the SoftX3000. Valid IP address NA

Filter string

Message filter string. For example, if “2803108” is entered, only messages containing “2803108” will be traced and displayed.

String with less than 27 characters NA

Incoming message Whether to trace received messages Selected/Not

selected Selected

Outgoing message Whether to trace sent messages Selected/Not

selected Selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Page 160: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-18

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the SIP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-16 lists a typical example of trace results for a SIP subscriber calling a voice subscriber.

Figure 5-16 SIP trace result display window

Figure 5-16 lists the SIP message sent between the SoftX3000 and the SIP device. Double click any message, and the content is displayed. For instance, double click the INVITE message, and a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-17. It displays the content of the INVITE message, including the called number 2801000.

Page 161: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-19

Figure 5-17 SIP message content

Note:

For detailed description of SIP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

In Figure 5-16, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.8 Tracing H.323 Messages

I. Overview of Tracing H.323 Messages

This node helps you trace the H.323 messages in the SoftX3000 or between a softswitch and a H.323 terminal.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “H.323” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [H323 Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-18.

Page 162: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-20

Figure 5-18 Defining H.323 message trace parameters

Table 5-7 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-18.

Table 5-7 Description of H.323 message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default value

IP address IP address of the H.323 user terminal to be traced. Valid IP address NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the H.323 message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-19 lists a typical example of trace results for an H.323 subscriber calling other subscribers (quick start).

Page 163: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-21

Figure 5-19 H.323 trace result display window

Figure 5-19 lists the H.323 message sent between the SoftX3000 and the H.323 terminal. Double click any message, and the content is displayed. For instance, double click the RAS_ARQ message, and a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-20. It displays the content of the RAS_ARQ message, including the called number 2802000.

Figure 5-20 H.323 message content

Note:

For detailed description of H.323, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

Page 164: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-22

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-19, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.9 Tracing SCTP Messages

I. Overview of Tracing SCTP Messages

This node helps you trace the SCTP messages between the SoftX3000 and a signaling gateway.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “SCTP” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [SCTP Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-21.

Figure 5-21 Defining SCTP message trace parameters

Table 5-8 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-21.

Page 165: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-23

Table 5-8 Description of SCTP message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

BSG module number processing SCTP, mandatory parameter.

The BSG module number defined in the system

NA

SCTP control message

Whether to trace SCTP control messages. Selected/Not selected Selected

SCTP data message

Whether to trace SCTP data messages. Tracing all data messages will lead to large amounts of data being transmitted, which affects system performance. After you choose this option, the system will ask if you want to continue. You can click <Yes> to confirm.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Local IP address/ Local port

For SCTP association, such as M2UA/M3UA/V5UA/IUA links, in the SoftX3000.

Any valid IP address and port number NA

Peer IP address/ Peer port

For SCTP association, such as M2UA/M3UA/V5UA/IUA links, on the signaling gateway side.

Any valid IP address and port number NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the SCTP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-22 shows the SCTP trace results for a normal call connection process whose conversation lasts for about six seconds (including the HEARTBEAT message generated in the non-call-connection process).

Page 166: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-24

Figure 5-22 SCTP trace result display window

Figure 5-22 lists the SCTP message sent between the SoftX3000 and the signaling gateway. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, double click any message in Figure 5-22, and a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-23. The dialog box contains a detailed explanation of the SCTP message, including the type of the data chunk of the SCTP message, TSN, stream sequence number (SSN), and payload protocol ID.

Page 167: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-25

Figure 5-23 MGCP message content

Note:

For detailed description of SCTP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-22, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.10 Tracing M2UA Messages

I. Overview of Tracing M2UA Messages

This node helps you trace the M2UA messages of an M2UA link between the SoftX3000 and a signaling gateway.

Page 168: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-26

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “M2UA” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [M2UA Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-24.

Figure 5-24 Defining M2UA message trace parameters

Table 5-9 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-24.

Table 5-9 Description of M2UA message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

BSG module number processing SCTP, mandatory parameter.

The BSG module number defined in the system NA

M2UA link number M2UA link number The M2UA link number

defined in the system NA

M2UA control message

Whether to trace M2UA control messages. Selected/Not selected Selected

Page 169: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-27

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

M2UA data message

Whether to trace M2UA data messages. Tracing all data messages will lead to large amounts of data being transmitted, which affects system performance. After you choose this option, the system will ask if you want to continue. You can click <Yes> to confirm.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

MPT link number

MTP link number borne by the M2UA link. It is valid when [M2UA data message] is selected.

The MTP link number on the M2UA link

Not selected

SCTP notify message

Notify message for whether to trace the SCTP layer Selected/Not selected Selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the M2UA message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-25 shows the M2UA trace results for a normal call connection process whose conversation lasts for about seven seconds.

Figure 5-25 M2UA trace result display window

Figure 5-25 lists the MTP2 User Adaptation (MAUP) message sent between the SoftX3000 and the signaling gateway. Double click any message, and the dialog box

Page 170: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-28

for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you click the first MAUP message in Figure 5-25, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-26. This dialog box contains the detailed content of the M2UA message; for example, in the protocol data unit (PDU), you can find the caller number 07552803101 and callee number 25000001 (displayed in BCD codes in the reverse order).

Figure 5-26 M2UA message content

Note:

For detailed description of M2UA, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-25, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

Page 171: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-29

5.2.11 Tracing M3UA Messages

I. Overview of Tracing M3UA Messages

This node helps you trace the M3UA messages of an M3UA link in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “M3UA” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [M3UA Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-27.

Figure 5-27 Defining M3UA message trace parameters

Page 172: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-30

Table 5-10 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-27.

Table 5-10 Description of M3UA message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

BSGI module number processing M3UA, mandatory parameter.

The defined BSGI module number NA

M3UA link number

M3UA link number to be traced, which can be queried by using the LST M3LNK command. Mandatory parameter.

The M3UA link number defined in the system

NA

Related message types

You can specify the tracing of the following message types related to M3UA:

SCCP message TUP message ISUP message BICC message M3UA message SCTP notify message

Selected/Not selected Selected

Link flags

You can specify the tracing of M3UA messages with the following flags:

NI flag: Network identification flag. You can select an international or a national flag.

OPC flag DPC flag H1 flag: Title H1 of signaling information field

(SIF) H0 flag: Title H0 of signaling information field

(SIF) SLS flag: Title SLS of signaling information

field (SIF) CIC flag: Used to specify the CIC range of the

TUP/ISUP message field SIF Direction flag: M3UA message direction

(send/receive)

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Page 173: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-31

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the M3UA message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-28shows the message trace results for activating and deactivating an M3UA link.

Figure 5-28 M3UA trace result display window

Figure 5-28 shows the related information of the M3UA management messages received or sent on the M3UA link in a call, including the Tick value for the generation time of a message and the message type (H1H0). Such fields as NI, CIC, SLS/SLC, OPC, and DPC are valid in M3UA call tracing. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you click the third message “NOTIFY” in Figure 5-28, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-29. The dialog box shows the details of this message; for example, [Notify Status Info] is “AS PENDING”.

Figure 5-29 M3UA message content

Page 174: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-32

Note:

For detailed description of M3UA, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-28, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.12 Tracing V5UA Messages

I. Overview of Tracing V5UA Messages

This node helps you trace the V5UA messages of a V5UA link in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “V5UA” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [V5UA Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-30.

Figure 5-30 Defining V5UA message trace parameters

Table 5-11 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-30.

Page 175: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-33

Table 5-11 Description of V5UA message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

BSGI module number processing V5UA, mandatory parameter.

The defined BSGI module number NA

V5UA link number

V5UA link number to be traced, which can be queried by using the LST V5UALNK command. Mandatory parameter.

The defined V5UA link number NA

V5UA control message Whether to trace V5UA control messages. Selected/Not selected Selected

V5UA data message Whether to trace V5UA data messages. Selected/Not selected Selected

V5UA physical link message

Whether to trace V5UA physical link layer messages. Selected/Not selected Selected

SCTP notify message Whether to trace SCTP notify messages. Selected/Not selected Selected

V5 link number

After you select it, you can enter the V5 link identifier of the V5 interface E1 between the SoftX3000 and the SG.

Selected/Not selected The defined V5 link identifier

Not selected

SG link number

After you select it, you can enter the E1 link identifier of the V5 interface on the SG side.

Selected/Not selected The defined E1 link identifier

Not selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the V5UA message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-31shows the trace results for deactivating and activating a V5UA link.

Page 176: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-34

Figure 5-31 V5UA trace result display window

Figure 5-31 shows the ASP service maintenance messages and layer management messages in the process of deactivating/activating the V5UA link. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click the last NOTIFY layer management message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-32. The dialog box shows the details of this message, indicating that the ASP is active.

Figure 5-32 V5UA message content

Note:

For detailed description of V5UA, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

Page 177: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-35

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-31, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.13 Tracing IUA Messages

I. Overview of Tracing IUA Messages

This node helps you trace the IUA messages of an IUA link in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “IUA” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [IUA Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-33.

Figure 5-33 Defining IUA message trace parameters

Table 5-12 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-33.

Table 5-12 Description of IUA message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

BSGI module number processing IUA, mandatory parameter.

The defined BSGI module number NA

IUA link number

IUA link number to be traced, which can be queried by using the LST IUALNK command. Mandatory parameter.

0–65535 NA

Page 178: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-36

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

IUA control message Whether to trace IUA control messages. Selected/Not

selected Selected

IUA data message Whether to trace IUA data messages. Selected/Not

selected Selected

SCTP notify message Whether to trace SCTP notify messages. Selected/Not

selected Selected

PRA link number

After you select it, you can enter the PRA interface link number that supports the IUA link.

Selected/Not selected 0–65534

Not selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the IUA message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-34 shows the trace results for an IUA call.

Figure 5-34 IUA trace result display window

Page 179: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-37

Figure 5-34 lists the IUA message received or sent by the SoftX3000 on the IUA link. Double click any message, and the content is displayed. For example, if you double click the first QPTM DATA_IND message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-35. The dialog box shows the content of this message, including the caller number 307030001 and callee number 0754555100062 (displayed in hexadecimal ASCII codes).

Figure 5-35 IUA message content

Note:

For detailed description of IUA, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-34, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

Page 180: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-38

5.2.14 Tracing MTP3 Messages

I. Overview of Tracing MTP3 Messages

This node helps you trace the MTP3 messages of an MTP3 link in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “MTP3” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [MTP3 Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-36.

Figure 5-36 Defining MTP3 message trace parameters

Page 181: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-39

Table 5-13 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-36.

Table 5-13 Description of MTP3 trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

BSGI module number processing MTP3, mandatory parameter.

The defined BSGI module number NA

MTP3 link number

MTP3 link number to be traced, which can be queried by using the LST N7LNK command. Mandatory parameter.

The MTP3 link number defined in the system

NA

Message types

You can specify the tracing of the following message types related to MTP3:

SNM message SLT message SCCP message TUP message ISUP message BICC message Unknown message Layer2 message

Selected/Not selected Selected

Link flags

You can specify the tracing of MTP3 messages with the following flags:

NI flag: Network identification flag. You can select an international or a national flag.

OPC flag DPC flag H1 flag: Title H1 of signaling information field

(SIF) H0 flag: Title H0 of signaling information field

(SIF) SLS flag: Title SLS of signaling information field

(SIF) CIC flag: Used to specify the CIC range of the

TUP/ISUP message field SIF Direction flag: MTP3 message direction

(send/receive)

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Page 182: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-40

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the MTP3 message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-37 shows the trace results for an MTP3 call.

Figure 5-37 MTP3 trace result display window

Figure 5-37 lists the information of the ISUP messages received or sent by the SoftX3000 on the MTP3 link, including NI, message type H1H0, CIC, SLS, OPC, and DPC. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click the first IAM message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-38. The dialog box shows the details of this message, including the caller number and callee number (the actual callee number is 25000001, while the IADM and the subsequent SAM message contain all the callee number information).

Figure 5-38 MTP3 message content

Page 183: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-41

Note:

For detailed description of MTP3, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-37, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.15 Tracing BRA Messages

I. Overview of Tracing BRA Messages

This node helps you trace the BRA interface signaling messages of a BRA subscriber in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “BRA” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [BRA Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-39.

Figure 5-39 Defining BRA message trace parameters

Table 5-14 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-39.

Page 184: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-42

Table 5-14 Description of BRA message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Subscriber number

BRA link number to be traced, which can be queried by using the LST BRA command.

The BRA subscriber number defined in the system

NA

Local DN Set Local DN set The local DN set to which the BRA subscriber belongs

NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the BRA interface message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-40 shows the trace results for a normal call process of a BRA subscriber.

Page 185: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-43

Figure 5-40 BRA trace result display window

Figure 5-40lists the information of the messages received or sent by the SoftX3000 on the BRA subscriber interface, including message type, message name, and Tick value. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, double click the first Q.931 SETUP message, and a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-41. It displays the content of the SETUP message, including the address information of the caller and callee.

Page 186: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-44

Figure 5-41 BRA message content

Note:

For detailed description of BRA, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-40, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.16 Tracing PRA Messages

I. Overview of Tracing PRA Messages

This node helps you trace the PRA signaling messages of a PRA link number in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “PRA” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [PRA Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-42.

Page 187: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-45

Figure 5-42 Defining PRA message trace parameters

Table 5-15 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-42.

Table 5-15 Description of PRA message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

PRA link number

PRA link number to be traced, which can be queried by using the LST PRALNK command. 0–65535 NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the PRA message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-43 shows the trace results for a PRA call.

Page 188: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-46

Figure 5-43 PRA trace result display window

Figure 5-43 lists the PRA message sent received or sent by the SoftX3000 on the PRA link. Double click any message, and the content is displayed. For example, if you double click the first Q.931 SETUP message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-44. The dialog box shows the content of the SETUP message, including the caller number 307030001 and callee number 0754555100062 (both are displayed in hexadecimal ASCII codes).

Page 189: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-47

Figure 5-44 PRA message content

Note:

For detailed description of PRA, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-43, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.17 Tracing V5 Messages

I. Overview of Tracing V5 Messages

This node helps you trace the V5 messages of a V5 interface in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “V5” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [V5 Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-45.

Page 190: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-48

Figure 5-45 Defining V5 message trace parameters

Table 5-16 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-45.

Table 5-16 Description of V5 message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

V5 interface ID

V5 interface ID to be traced, which can be queried by using the LST V5I command.

The V5 interface ID defined in the system

NA

C-channel number

When you select it, you can enter the C-channel number of the V5 interface.

Selected/Not selected 0–65534

Not selected

V5 L3 address

When you select it, you can enter the V5 L3 address in the V5 interface.

Selected/Not selected 0–65535

Not selected

PSTN protocol

Whether to trace the PSTN protocol borne on the physical channel C in the V5 interface.

Selected/Not selected Selected

BCC protocol

Whether to trace the bearer channel connection (BCC) protocol borne on the physical channel C in the V5 interface.

Selected/Not selected Selected

Page 191: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-49

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Link control protocol

Whether to trace the link control protocol borne on the physical channel C in the V5 interface.

Selected/Not selected Selected

Protect protocol

Whether to trace the protect protocol borne on the physical channel C in the V5 interface.

Selected/Not selected Selected

Control protocol

Whether to trace the control protocol borne on the physical channel C in the V5 interface.

Selected/Not selected Selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the V5 message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-46 shows the trace results for a V5 call.

Figure 5-46 V5 trace result display window

Figure 5-46 lists the PSTN/BCC messages borne by the SoftX3000 on the V5 interface. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click the first V5_ESTABLISH message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-47 The dialog box shows the content of this message, including “256” for [L3 address] and “Offhook” for [Steady signal type].

Page 192: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-50

Figure 5-47 V5 message content

Note:

For detailed description of V5, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-46, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.18 Tracing SCCP DPC Messages

I. Overview of Tracing SCCP DPC Messages

This node helps you trace the SCCP DPC messages sent between the SoftX3000 and a device with a specified DPC.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “SCCP DPC” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [SCCP DPC Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-48.

Page 193: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-51

Figure 5-48 Defining SCCP DPC message trace parameters

Table 5-17 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-48.

Table 5-17 Description of SCCP DPC message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

FCCU board module number processing SCCP, optional parameter.

The FCCU module number defined in the system

NA

Network indicator

Used to specify in which signaling network the signaling code to be traced is to be located.

There are four options: international network, international standby network, national network, and national standby network.

National network

DPC Used to specify the DPC of the SCCP message to be traced. Mandatory parameter.

The defined SCCP DPC NA

OPC Used to specify the OPC of the SCCP message to be traced. Mandatory parameter.

The defined SCCP OPC NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Page 194: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-52

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the SCCP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-49 shows the SCCP trace results for a normal intelligent network (IN) call connection process.

Figure 5-49 SCCP DPC trace result display window

Figure 5-49 lists the SCCP messages received or sent by the FCCU board. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click a message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-50. The dialog box shows the content of this message, including the signaling link select code, original point code, destination point code, and TCAP message data.

Page 195: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-53

Figure 5-50 SCCP DPC message content

Note:

For detailed description of SCCP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-49, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.19 Tracing SCCP User Messages

I. Overview of Tracing SCCP User Messages

This node helps you trace the messages received and sent by the SoftX3000 between SCCP and upper user layers (such as TCAP/INAP).

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “SCCP User” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [SCCP User Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-51.

Page 196: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-54

Figure 5-51 Defining SCCP User message trace parameters

Table 5-18 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-51.

Table 5-18 Description of SCCP User trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

FCCU board module number processing SCCP, optional parameter.

The FCCU module number defined in the system

NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the SCCP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-52 shows the SCCP trace results for a normal IN call connection process.

Page 197: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-55

Figure 5-52 SCCP User trace result display window

Figure 5-52 lists the SCCP messages received or sent by the SoftX3000 between SCCP and user layers. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click a message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-53. The dialog box shows the content of this message, including the message type, direction, network indication, and TCAP message data.

Page 198: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-56

Figure 5-53 SCCP User message content

Note:

For detailed description of SCCP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-52, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.20 Tracing SCCP MTP Messages

I. Overview of Tracing SCCP MTP Messages

This node helps you trace the signaling interaction between the SCCP processing module and the lower-layer MTP maintenance management messages.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “SCCP MTP” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [SCCP MTP Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-54.

Page 199: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-57

Figure 5-54 Defining SCCP MTP message trace parameters

Table 5-19 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-54.

Table 5-19 Description of SCCP MTP message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

FCCU board module number processing SCCP, optional parameter.

The FCCU module number defined in the system

NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the SCCP MTP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-55 shows the message trace results for deactivating and activating an MTP link.

Page 200: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-58

Figure 5-55 SCCP MTP trace result display window

Figure 5-55 lists the SCCP messages received by the SCCP processing module from the MTP layer. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click the first MTP_PAUSE_IND message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-55. The dialog box shows the content of this message, including the network indication, DPC, and OPC.

Figure 5-56 SCCP MTP message content

Note:

For detailed description of SCCP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-55, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

Page 201: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-59

5.2.21 Tracing TCAP SCCP Messages

I. Overview of Tracing TCAP SCCP Messages

This node helps you trace the messages received and sent by the SoftX3000 between TCAP and lower SCCP layer.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “TCAP SCCP” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [TCAP SCCP Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-51.

Figure 5-57 Defining TCAP SCCP message trace parameters

Table 5-20 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-51.

Table 5-20 Description of TCAP SCCP message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

FCCU board module number processing TCAP/SCCP, optional parameter.

The FCCU module number defined in the system

NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Page 202: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-60

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the TCAP SCCP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window on the right. Figure 5-58 shows the TCAP SCCP trace results for a normal IN call connection process.

Figure 5-58 TCAP SCCP trace result display window

Figure 5-52 lists the TCAP SCCP messages received or sent by the SoftX3000 between TCAP and SCCP. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click a message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-59. The dialog box shows the content of this message.

Page 203: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-61

Figure 5-59 TCAP SCCP message content

Note:

For detailed description of TCAP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-58, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.22 Tracing TCAP User Messages

I. Overview of Tracing TCAP User Messages

This node helps you trace the messages received and sent by the SoftX3000 between TCAP and upper user layers (such as INAP).

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “TCAP User” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [TCAP User Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-60.

Page 204: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-62

Figure 5-60 Defining TCAP User message trace parameters

Table 5-21 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-60.

Table 5-21 Description of TCAP User trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

FCCU board module number processing TCAP, optional parameter.

The FCCU module number defined in the system

NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the TCAP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-52 shows the TCAP User trace results for a normal IN call connection process (including the input of the card number and password).

Page 205: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-63

Figure 5-61 TCAP User trace result display window

Figure 5-61lists the TCAP User messages received or sent by the SoftX3000 between TCAP and INAP. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click the first TC_INVOKE_REQ message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-62. The dialog box shows the content of this message, including the caller number 0755201455550005 and callee number (200#, displayed as “200C” in the figure).

Page 206: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-64

Figure 5-62 TCAP User message content

Note:

For detailed description of TCAP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-61, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.23 Tracing CSP Messages

I. Overview of Tracing CSP Messages

This node helps you trace the INAP message stream between the built-in IN service module of the SoftX3000 and the CSP.

Page 207: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-65

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “CSP” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [CSP Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-63.

Figure 5-63 Defining CSP message trace parameters

Table 5-22 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-63.

Table 5-22 Description of CSP message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

It processes the FCCU/FCSU or CDB module numbers of the built-in IN service. Optional parameter.

The FCCU/FCSU or CDBI module numbers defined in the system

NA

Service key Service key of the built-in IN service The defined built-in IN service key NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Page 208: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-66

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the CSP message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-64 shows the CSP trace results for a normal super do-not-disturb call connection process.

Figure 5-64 CSP trace result display window

Figure 5-64 lists the IANP messages between the built-in IN service module and the CSP in a super do-not-disturb call process. Double click any message, and the dialog box for explaining this message is displayed. For example, if you double click the first IA_initialDP message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-65. The dialog box shows the content of this message, including the caller number (201520000101) and callee number (190201520000001, in which “190” is the prefix of the super do-not-disturb service).

Page 209: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-67

Figure 5-65 CSP message content

Note:

For detailed description of CSP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-64, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.24 Tracing Bill Messages

I. Overview of Tracing Bill Messages

This node helps you trace the bills of a subscriber number or trunk group in the SoftX3000.

Page 210: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-68

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “Bill” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [Bill message trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-66.

Figure 5-66 Defining Bill message trace parameters

Table 5-23 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-66.

Table 5-23 Description of Bill message trace parameters

Trace type Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default value

Subscriber number Caller number to be traced.

A number already existing in the system

NA

Caller

Local DN set Local DN set of the caller number to be traced.

The DN set to which the caller number belongs

NA

Subscriber number Callee number to be traced.

A number already existing in the system

NA Callee (valid in the callee group charging mode) Local DN set Local DN set of the callee

number to be traced. The DN set to which the callee number belongs

NA

Trunk group Trunk group Trunk group number

The trunk group number that has been configured with charging data in the system

NA

Page 211: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-69

Trace type Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default value

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the IUA message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-67 lists the Bill trace results for two calls of a caller.

Figure 5-67 Bill trace result display window

For example, if you double click a message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-68. The dialog box shows the content of this message, including the call duration of the bill (71179 Ticks, that is, 711790 milliseconds, which is about 11 minutes 52 seconds), caller number (07552803101), and callee number (02125000001).

Page 212: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-70

Figure 5-68 Bill message content

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-67, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.25 Tracing Circuit Messages

I. Overview of Tracing Circuit Messages

This node helps you trace the Circuit messages of an ISUP/TUP circuit in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “Circuit” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [Circuit Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-69.

Page 213: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-71

Figure 5-69 Defining Circuit message trace parameters

Table 5-24 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-69.

Table 5-24 Description of Circuit trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Module number

FCCU board module number to which the circuit belongs.

The defined FCCU module number NA

Device type Circuit device type, which can be ISUP or TUP. ISUP or TUP NA

Circuit number

Circuit number, which can be queried by using the LST TKC command.

The ISUP/TUP trunk circuit defined in the system

NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Page 214: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-72

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the corresponding circuit message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-70 shows the trace results for an ISUP call.

Figure 5-70 Circuit trace result display window

Figure 5-70 lists the ISUP messages received or sent by the SoftX3000 on a circuit. Double click any message, and the content is displayed. For example, if you double click the first IAM message, a dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-71. The dialog box shows the content of this message, including the information of the caller and callee (25000001).

Figure 5-71 Circuit trace message content

Page 215: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-73

Note:

For detailed description of ISUP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-70, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.26 Tracing Console Messages

I. Overview of Tracing Console Messages

This node helps you trace the protocol interaction between the SoftX3000 and the IP Centrex console (U-Path).

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “Console” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [Console Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-72.

Figure 5-72 Defining Console trace parameters

Page 216: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-74

Table 5-25 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-72.

Table 5-25 Description of Console trace parameters

Trace type Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

Subscriber number

Subscriber number of the console to be traced.

A subscriber number of a defined console

NA

By subscriber number

Local DN set Local DN set to which a subscriber number of a console to be traced belongs.

The DN set to which the subscriber number of the console belongs

NA

By console number

Console number

Number of the console to be traced.

A subscriber number already existing in the system

NA

Output shake hand messages Whether to export shake hand messages.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Output confirm messages Whether to export confirm messages.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected

Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the Console message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-73 shows the trace results for

Page 217: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-75

operations on the console, including setting it busy, maintaining subscriber data, maintaining the long-short number comparison table, and exiting.

Figure 5-73 Console trace result display window

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-73, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.2.27 Tracing STUN Messages

I. Overview of Tracing STUN Messages

This node helps you trace the STUN interaction of a device with a specified IP address and port number in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “STUN” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [STUN Message Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-74.

Page 218: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-76

Figure 5-74 Defining STUN message trace parameters

Table 5-26 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-74.

Table 5-26 Description of STUN message trace parameters

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default

value

IP address IP address of the STUN device to be traced. The STUN device can be a STUN server (SoftX3000) or STUN client (U-Path).

An existing IP address of the device NA

Port number Port number of the STUN device. The STUN port of the SoftX3000 can be queried by using the LST STUNDISP command.

The defined STUN port number NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time

Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Page 219: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-77

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the STUN message trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-75 shows the trace results for STUN interaction in the process of logging in to the console.

Figure 5-75 STUN trace result display window

Figure 5-75 shows the STUN interaction between the IFMI board and the console in the process of logging in to the console. “2.22.2.100” is the IP address of the FE interface of the IFMI board, and “2.29.200.109” is the IP address of the console.

Note:

For details on STUN, refer to “Simple Traversal of UDP Through Network Address Translators (STUN)” in the IETF recommendation “draft-ietf-sigtran-m2pa-06”.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-75, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5.1 Processing Trace Results.

5.3 Tracing User Signaling

5.3.1 Overview of User Trace Tasks

Expand the “user trace task” node, and the user trace tasks are shown in Figure 5-76.

Page 220: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-78

Figure 5-76 Navigation tree of user trace tasks

5.3.2 Tracing Interface Signaling

I. Overview of Tracing Interface Signaling

It helps you trace the interface signaling messages of certain subscribers in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “Interface Signaling Trace” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [Trace Signaling Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-77.

Figure 5-77 Defining parameters for tracing user interface signaling

Page 221: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-79

Table 5-27 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-77.

Table 5-27 Description of parameters for tracing user interface signaling

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default value

Trace type You can select “By subscriber number” or “MID + UID + PSN”.

subscriber number or MID + UID + PSN

By subscriber number

Relative trace Whether to trace relative messages YES or NO YES

Subscriber number

This parameter is valid when the trace type is “By subscriber number”.

Subscriber number configured in the system

NA

Local DN set This parameter is valid when the trace type is “By subscriber number”.

DN set of the configured subscriber

NA

Module number

This parameter is valid when the trace type is “MID + UID + PSN”.

Module number of the configured subscriber

NA

User type This parameter is valid when the trace type is “MID + UID + PSN”.

UID_WIRED/UID_ETS/UID_PRA/UID_TCI/UID_ESL/UID_SIPSL/UID_H323SL/UID_BRA/UID_R2

UID_WIRED

Equipment number

This parameter is valid when the trace type is “MID+UID+PSN”.

Number of the configured equipment

NA

Combination This parameter is mandatory. ISUP, SIP, CAP, INAP, PRA, BRA, R2

NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Page 222: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-80

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the user interface trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-78displays an example of interface trace results on a normal ISUP call.

Figure 5-78 Display window of interface signaling trace results

In Figure 5-78, the red messages are messages interacting in the SoftX3000, and the blue and black ones are messages interacting with external network components. Double click the first IAM message in Figure 5-78, and the detailed explanations of the message is displayed in Figure 5-79, including the callee number 6660017.

Page 223: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-81

Figure 5-79 Detailed explanations of an interface trace message

Note:

For detailed description of ISUP, refer to SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Technical Manual-Signaling & Protocols.

IV. Processing Trace Results

In Figure 5-78, right click the results, and you can process the trace results. Refer to section 5.5 Exporting and Reviewing Trace Results for details.

5.3.3 Tracing Call Connections

I. Overview of Tracing Call Connections

It helps you trace the call connection process of certain subscribers in the SoftX3000.

II. Defining Trace Parameters

Double click the “Call Connection Trace” node in the interface trace navigation tree, and the [Call Connection Trace] dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-80.

Page 224: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-82

Figure 5-80 Defining parameters for tracing call connections

Table 5-28 describes the usage and range of value for the parameters used in Figure 5-80.

Table 5-28 Description of parameters for tracing call connections

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default value

Trace type You can select “By subscriber” or “MID+UID+PSN”.

subscriber number or MID+UID+PSN

By subscriber number

Subscriber number

This parameter is valid when the trace type is “By subscriber number”.

Subscriber number configured in the system

NA

Local DN set This parameter is valid when the trace type is “By subscriber number”.

DN set of the configured subscriber

NA

Time

When you select it, you can specify the task start time and end time of the trace task. When you leave it unselected, the system will start the trace task immediately.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

Start/End time Defines the start time and end time of the trace task. They are valid when the [Time] option is selected.

In format of [1978-1-1,2038-1-18]

Half hour starting from the current time

Page 225: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-83

Parameter name Parameter description Range of value Default value

Auto save to file

Defines whether the trace results are automatically saved in the folder “trace” under the SoftX3000 installation folder. The file name includes date, time, and trace message type. You can read the trace results can be with the “Trace Viewer” tool.

Selected/Not selected Not selected

III. Viewing Trace Results

After defining the parameters, click <OK>, and the call connection trace results are displayed in the trace result window. Figure 5-81displays an example of call connection trace results on a normal ISUP call.

Page 226: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-84

Figure 5-81 Display window of call connection trace results

As shown in Figure 5-81, the user information is calssified into three parts:

GivenSubs—information of a specific subscriber RelaSubs—information of related subscribers ThirdSubs—information of a third-party subscriber

Table 5-29 Description of call connection trace results window

Category Field name Description

GivenSubs Dn Subscriber number (dial number)

Page 227: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-85

Category Field name Description

State State transition process

Call Type Call type

RelaSubs State State transition process of the line

LineTx Returned messages

LineRx Received messages

Note:

The other two trace tasks—“Caller or callee trace” and “UMG user trace”—have the same operation procedure as that of the “interface signaling trace”, and will not be elaborated here.

5.4 Using Maintenance Management Node

5.4.1 Overview of Maintenance Management Node

The maintenance management node helps you maintain and manage the CPU, memory, signaling links, No.7 links, terminals, and module communication. Figure 5-82 lists the available features.

Figure 5-82 Maintenance management navigation tree

Page 228: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-86

5.4.2 Querying CPU Usage

I. Specifying Parameters to be Queried

Double click the “CPU Usage” node, and the parameter input dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-83.

Figure 5-83 Specifying parameters to query CPU usage

When you select “Position”, you have to specify the frame number and slot number of the board.

When you select “Module”, you have to specify the module number of the board.s

II. Alternative Query Modes

You can also use one of the following two methods to query the CPU usage:

Run the command DSP CPUR in the command window. Right click the board to be queried in the device panel view, select [Display CPU

Usage], and the system will display the CPU usage of the board in real time. Refer to section 2.7.6 Querying CPU Usage in chapter 2 “Using MML Client” for details.

III. Querying Results and Modifying Tasks

After specifying the parameters, click <Add>, and then click <Close>, the CPU usage is displayed in the output window, as shown in Figure 5-84. The curve is refreshed every five seconds.

Page 229: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-87

Figure 5-84 CPU usage display window

You can right click on the upper window of Figure 5-84 to add or delete a CPU usage query task.

To add a task, Specify the parameters and click <Add>. The system will display the newly added curve of CPU usage with a different color.

To delete a task, Select the task to be deleted in the task list, and click <Delete>.

5.4.3 Querying Memory Usage

I. Specifying Parameters to be Queried

Double click the “Memory Usage” node, and the parameter input dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 5-85.

Page 230: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-88

Figure 5-85 Specifying parameters to query memory usage

When you select “Position”, you have to specify the frame number and slot number of the board.

When you select “Module”, you have to specify the module number of the board.

II. Alternative Query Modes

Right click the board to be queried in the device panel view, select [Display Memory Usage], and the system will display the CPU usage of the board in real time. Refer to section 2.7.7 Querying Memory Usage in chapter 2 “Using MML Client” for details.

III. Querying Results and Modifying Tasks

After specifying the parameters, click <Add>, and then click <Close>, the memory usage is displayed in the output window, as shown in Figure 5-86. The curve is refreshed every five seconds.

Page 231: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-89

Figure 5-86 Memory usage display window

You can right click on the upper window of Figure 5-86 to add or delete a memory usage query task.

To add a task, Specify the parameters and click <Add>. The system will display the newly added curve of memory usage with a different color.

To delete a task, Select the task to be deleted in the task list, and click <Delete>.

5.4.4 Querying Inquire Memory

I. Querying RAM Content

Proceed as follows:

1) Double click the node “Inquire Inquire Memory” in the maintenance management navigation tree.

2) Select RAM in “Query type”. 3) Select a module number. 4) Specify the start address of the RAM to be queried in hexadecimal numeral. 5) Specify the “Active or standby flag” the RAM to be queried.

To view the query results:

After specifying the parameters, click <Query>, and 128 bytes of RAM content (starting from the start address) are displayed as shown in Figure 5-87.

Page 232: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-90

Figure 5-87 RAM query window

II. Querying Flash Content

Proceed as follows:

1) Double click the node “Memory content” in the maintenance management navigation tree.

2) Select Flash in “Query type”. 3) Specify the frame number of the board. 4) Select the slot number of the board. 5) Specify the start address of the flash to be queried in hexadecimal numeral. 6) Specify the number of bytes to be queried.

To view the query results:

After specifying the parameters, click <Query>, and the specified length of Flash content (starting from the start address) is displayed as shown in Figure 5-88.

Figure 5-88 Flash query window

Page 233: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-91

5.4.5 Dumping Memory Content

I. Overview of Dumping Memory Content

The memory dumping feature helps you save the content of the board memory for future analysis (in case of system error). It will be extremely helpful when a remote office is faulty without technical support engineers on site. The dumped content can be a useful reference for debugging.

II. Defining the Dump Parameters

Proceed as follows:

1) Double click the node “Dump Memory” in the maintenance management navigation tree.

2) Select a module number. 3) Specify the start address of the RAM to be queried in hexadecimal numeral. 4) Specify the end address of the RAM to be queried in hexadecimal numeral. It

must be greater than the start address. 5) Select “Active or standby flag” whether it is the active or standby RAM to be

queried.

6) Select the path and file name to dump the memory content. You can click ,

and the [Save As…] dialog box is displayed. Then specify the file name (*.DAT) and path.

III. Dumping the Content to File

After specifying the parameters, click <Query>, and the specified length of memory block is saved to the file, as shown in Figure 5-89.

Page 234: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-92

Figure 5-89 Memory dump window

Note:

It will take longer duration for the system to dump larger memory blocks to file.

5.4.6 Querying MTP3 Link Status

I. Operation Procedure

You can query the status of different types of MTP3 links in multiple modes.

Proceed as follows:

1) Double click the node “MTP3 Link Status” in the maintenance management navigation tree.

2) Select a query type.

You can query the link status by OPC & DPC, by module, or by link set.

In query by module and link set, the module number is the one of the BSGI which processes the MTP3 link.

To view the results:

After specifying the parameters, click <Query>, and the status of the MTP3 links is displayed as shown in Figure 5-90.

Page 235: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-93

Figure 5-90 Querying MTP3 link status

II. Additional Operations on the Link

Select one or multiple query records in Figure 5-90 and right click, and a shortcut menu is displayed. You can perform the following operations:

[Activate link] is available when the link is in deactivated state. [Deactivate link] is available when the link is in activated state. [Inhibit link]: is available when the link is in uninhibited state. [Uninhibit link] is available when the link is in inhibited state. [Details]: displays the MTP3 link status in text.

5.4.7 Querying No.7 Link Status

I. Operation Procedure

Proceed as follows:

1) Double click the node “No7 Circuit Status” in the maintenance management navigation tree.

2) Select a query type.

You can query the link status by circuit or office direction

The module number of the No.7 link is the module number of the FCCU.

To query the results:

After specifying the parameters, click <Query>, and the status of the No.7 links is displayed as shown in Figure 5-91.

Page 236: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-94

Figure 5-91 Querying No.7 link status

Select one or multiple query records in Figure 5-91 and right click, a shortcut menu is displayed. You can perform the following operations:

Block Circuit Unblock Circuit Stop Block Circuit Stop Unblock Circuit

5.4.8 Querying Media Gateway Status

I. Overview of Querying Media Gateway Status

This node helps you query the status of media gateways by equipment ID, MGW type, or module number.

II. Defining Query Parameters

Double click the node “Media Gateway Status” in the maintenance management navigation tree. Configure the following parameter in the window:

Equipment ID: You can use the wildcard * and ? in the equipment ID. This parameter is case sensitive.

MGW type: You can select “All” to query all types of media gateways, or select a specific type such as AG, TG, IAD, UMG, MRS, and MTA.

Module number: It is the FCCU module number to which the media gateway belongs. You can enter “All" to query all modules or specify a module number.

Page 237: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-95

III. Checking Query Results

After specifying the query parameters, click <Query>, and the information of the queried media gateways will be displayed as shown in Figure 5-92.

Figure 5-92 Querying media gateway status

5.4.9 Querying H.323/SIP Terminal Status

I. Overview of Querying H.323/SIP Terminal Status

This node helps you query the status and number information of the H.323/SIP terminals.

II. Defining Query Parameters

Double click the node “H.323/SIP Terminal Status” in the maintenance management navigation tree. Configure the following parameters in the window:

Equipment ID: You can use the wildcard * and ? in the equipment ID. This parameter is case sensitive.

Module number: It is the FCCU module number to which the terminal belongs. You can enter “All" to query all modules or specify a module number.

III. Checking Query Results

After specifying the query parameters, click <Query>, the information of the queried H.323/SIP terminals will be displayed as shown in Figure 5-93.

Page 238: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-96

Figure 5-93 Querying H.323/SIP terminal status

5.4.10 Querying MGCP/H.248 Terminal Status

I. Overview of Querying MGCP/H.248 Terminal Status

This node helps you query the status and number information of the MGCP/H.248 terminals

II. Defining Query Parameters

Double click the node “MGCP/H.248 Terminal Status” in the maintenance management navigation tree. Configure the following parameters in the window:

Equipment ID: You can use the wildcard * and ? in the equipment ID. This parameter is case sensitive.

Termination ID Module number: It is the FCCU module number to which the terminal belongs.

You can enter “All" to query all modules or specify a module number. MGW type: The type of media gateway to which the terminal to be queried

belongs. You can select “All” to query all types of media gateways, or select a specific type such as AG, TG, IAD, UMG, and MRS.

III. Checking Query Results

After specifying the query parameters, click <Query>, the information of the queried MGCP/H.248 terminals will be displayed as shown in Figure 5-94.

Page 239: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-97

Figure 5-94 Querying MGCP/H.248 terminal status

5.4.11 Querying Module Communication Status

I. Overview of Querying MTP3 Link Status

This node helps you query the communication status among modules such as IFMI, FCCU, CDBI, SMUI, BSGI, MSGI, and MRCA.

II. Defining Query Parameters

Double click the node “Module Communication Status” in the maintenance management navigation tree. Configure the following parameters in the window:

Frame number Slot number Communication port type Peer module number: This parameter is available when the communication port

type is Q.922 or Ether Link. CPCI Slot number: It is the CPCI slot number of peer end. This parameter is

available when the communication port type is CPCI. Serial Port Number: This parameter is available when the communication port

type is Serial Port.

III. Checking Query Results

After specifying the query parameters, click <Query>, the inter-modular communication status will be displayed as shown in Figure 5-95. Here, you can see that there are five faulty TCP links in slot 6.

Page 240: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-98

Figure 5-95 Querying module communication status

5.5 Exporting and Reviewing Trace Results

5.5.1 Processing Trace Results

Right click in the trace result window, and a shortcut menu is displayed as shown in Figure 5-96.

Figure 5-96 Shortcut menu in MGCP message trace result window

Table 5-30 describes the functions of the menu items in Figure 5-96.

Table 5-30 Description of menu items in the shortcut menu in the message trace result window

Menu name Functions Remark

Save All Messages Saves all messages to file. The file name consists of message type, date, and time. You can view the file using the Trace Viewer tool.

Save Selected Messages Saves the selected messages to file. The file name consists of message type, date, and time. You can view the file using the Trace Viewer tool.

Auto Scroll Defines whether the system automatically scrolls the screen and displays the new messages.

NA

Clear messages Clears all messages NA

Page 241: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-99

Menu name Functions Remark

Signaling Analyze All Analyzes all messages in the result window.

The message type can be MGCP, H.248, SIP, H.323, M3UA, MTP3, PRA, and TCAP User. The menu item is available when there are messages in the result window.

Signaling Analyze Selected Analyzes the selected messages in the result window.

The message type can be MGCP, H.248, SIP, H.323, M3UA, MTP3, PRA, and TCAP User. The menu item is available when you select one or multiple messages in the result window.

Close All ***** Message Trace Tasks Closes all trace task windows NA

Property Displays the information of the current trace task. NA

5.5.2 Using Trace Viewer

I. Overview of Trace Viewer

The trace viewer is a useful tool which helps you browse the trace results. The trace review supports a binary file format *.tmf, which is generated from one of the following two ways:

Right click in the trace result window, and select [Save All Messages] or [Save Selected Messages] in the pop-up shortcut menu. Save the trace results to a tmf file. The default path is x:\SoftX3000\Output in the client installation folder.

Select "Auto save to file” in the trace window. The system will automatically save the trace results to x:\SoftX3000\Trace.

II. Starting Trace Viewer

Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Trace Viewer], and the "U-SYS SoftX3000 Trace Viewer" dialog box is displayed.

III. Opening Trace Result File

You can open the “Open…” dialog box in any of the following two methods:

When you start the “U-SYS SoftX3000 Trace Viewer”, the open dialog box is displayed.

Select [File/Open…] or the button in the main interface of “U-SYS

SoftX3000 Trace Viewer”.

Page 242: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-100

IV. Selecting Trace Result Files to be Opened

You can select one or multiple tmf trace files (must be for the same message), then click <Open>. Figure 5-97 shows the details.

Figure 5-97 Selecting files to be opened in trace viewer

Note:

You can select ten trace result files at a time, including a maximum of 50000 messages.

Figure 5-98 shows the main interface of trace viewer after opening files.

Figure 5-98 Main interface of trace viewer

Page 243: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-101

V. Browsing Trace Messages

Click a trace messages, and a detailed explanation window is displayed as shown in Figure 5-99.

Figure 5-99 Message explanation window in trace viewer

VI. Using the Shortcut Menu

Right click in the main interface of trace viewer, and the shortcut menu will be displayed as shown in Figure 5-100.

Figure 5-100 Shortcut menu in trace viewer

Table 5-31 describes the functions of menu items in Figure 5-100.

Page 244: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-102

Table 5-31 Description of shortcut menu items in trace viewer

Menu name Description

Save All Messages It is available when there are messages in the main interface. You need to specify the name of the file name.

Save Selected Messages It is available when there are messages selected. You have to enter the file name to be saved to.

Signaling Analyze All

Signaling Analyze Selected They support protocols such as MGCP, H.248, SIP, H.323, M3UA, MTP, PRA, and TCAP User. Refer to Figure 5-101 for details.

Filter Set the range of time and specific message type. Click <OK> or <Apply>. The messages not meeting the requirement will be excluded from display.

Undo Filter NA

Figure 5-101 Message filter dialog box in trace viewer

5.6 Analyzing Signaling Trace Results

5.6.1 Functions of Signaling Analysis

You can analyze signaling related information, including MGCP, H.248, SIP, and H.323, in the following aspects:

Analyzing and listing every call in the signaling. Querying signaling messages related to a certain call to analyze the signaling

interaction process. Analyzing call completion rate of caller.

Page 245: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-103

Analyzing call completion rate of callee. Analyzing the cause of failure of a specific call. Analyzing the call completion rate of a caller or callee. Collecting metrics and analyzing scenarios of early releases and no answers. Analyzing the extremely short bills and call durations. Collecting metrics and analyzing the sending and receiving of a message. Saving and finding analysis results.

5.6.2 Description of Signaling Analysis Interface

Figure 5-102 shows the signaling analysis window.

Figure 5-102 Signaling analysis window

Here are the descriptions of sections in Figure 5-102:

Call information list: It is the upper left pane, which displays the detailed call information of the analyzed signaling. It also supports pop up shortcut menus.

Signaling flowchart: It is the upper right pane, which displays the signaling flow of the selected call. The red lines are messages sent from the SoftX3000; the yellow ones are information and message of the remote end equipment sent to the SoftX3000; the blue ones are currently selected messages.

Signaling message and metrics analysis list: It is in the lower part of the window, which displays the call related signaling message flows, analysis, and statistical results.

Toolbar: It is on the left, which provides the same functions as the shortcut menu.

Page 246: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-104

5.6.3 Signaling Analysis Operations

I. Starting Signaling Analysis

You can start the signaling analysis window in the client interface using any of the following two methods:

Right click in the interface signaling trace result window, and select [Signaling Analyze All] or [Signaling Analyze Selected] in the pop up shortcut menu.

Open saved trace result files in “U-SYS SoftX3000 Trace Viewer”, right click in the main interface and select [Signaling Analyze All] or [Signaling Analyze Selected] in the pop up shortcut menu.

II. Checking Call Information List

Table 5-32 details the call related information in the analyzed signaling as shown in Figure 5-102.

Table 5-32 Description of call related items

Item name Description

CR Number Call sequence number

Caller Caller number. For MGCP/H.248 signaling, it is displayed as the “Termination ID” of the terminal.

Callee Callee number

Time Setup The Tick value (of 10 ms) at the initiation of call. It is displayed as Time IAM in MTP3 and M3UA signaling trace.

Time Alert The Tick value (of 10 ms) at callee alerting (ringing). It is displayed as Time ACM in MTP3 and M3UA signaling trace.

Time Connect The Tick value (of 10 ms) at start of conversation. It is displayed as Time ANC in MTP3 and M3UA signaling trace.

Time Release The Tick value (of 10 ms) at call release. It is displayed as Time CLF in MTP3 and M3UA signaling trace.

Received Alert Whether alerting message is received.

Received Connect Whether connection message is received.

Call State Call connection is successful or failed.

III. Querying Related Information of a Call

In the signaling analysis interface, you can use one of the following three methods to query all related information of a call from request for call setup to call release:

Double click a call record in the call information list. Right click a call record in the call information list, and select [Show Related

Messages] in the pop up shortcut menu.

Page 247: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-105

Select a call record in the call information list, and click the button in the

toolbar.

Then, the signaling flowchart and the signaling message and metrics analysis list will display the message flow of the currently select call. Refer to Figure 5-102 for details.

Double click a message in the signaling flowchart or the metric analysis list, and a detailed explanation window is displayed as shown in Figure 5-103.

Figure 5-103 Message explanation window of related signaling

Note:

When you select a message in the signaling flowchart, it is automatically selected in the related signaling process list; and it also works the other way round.

IV. Analyzing Call Information of Caller

There are two ways to analyze the call information of the caller in the signaling analysis interface:

Select the second shortcut menu item in the call information list. It differs in different signaling and protocols. For instance, in SIP/H.323/MTP3/PRA trace, it

Page 248: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-106

is [Caller Number Analysis]; in MGCP trace, it is [End Point ID Analysis]; and in H.248 trace, it is [Termination Analysis].

Click the button in the toolbar.

Enter the following parameters in the pop up dialog box:

Caller ID: It is caller number (SIP, H.323, MTP3, M3UA, and PRA messages), termination ID (H.248 messages), and endpoint ID (MGCP messages). If you leave it blank, all calls will be analyzed.

Call direction: It is valid for MTP3 and M3UA signaling analysis. You can select In-Coming, Out-going or Both Directions.

After defining parameters, click <OK>, and the analysis results will be displayed in the signaling message and metrics analysis list as shown in Figure 5-104. Here, you can see call related information of caller such as call times, successful calls, and success rates.

Figure 5-104 Call information analysis results of caller

In Figure 5-104, double click an analysis result, and a list of signaling messages related to all calls will be displayed in the “Stats Related Messages”, as shown in Figure 5-105.

Page 249: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-107

Figure 5-105 A list of related messages of the analyzed signaling message

Double click any message in Figure 5-105, and you will see the detailed explanations of the message.

V. Analyzing Call Information of Callee

There are two ways to analyze the call information of the callee in the signaling analysis interface:

Right click in the call information list, and select [Called Number Analysis] in the pop up shortcut menu.

Click the button in the toolbar.

Enter the callee number and call direction in the pop up dialog box. If you leave the callee number blank, all calls will be analyzed. The call direction is valid for the analysis of MTP3 and M3UA signaling. You can select In-Coming, Out-going, and Both Directions.

Page 250: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-108

After defining parameters, click <OK>, and the analysis results will be displayed in the signaling message and metrics analysis list as shown in Figure 5-106. Here, you can see call related information of callee such as call times, successful calls, and success rates.

Figure 5-106 Analysis results of call information of callee

In Figure 5-106, double click an analysis result, and a list of signaling messages related to all calls will be displayed in the “Stats Related Messages”, similar to those shown in Figure 5-105.

VI. Analyzing Cause of Failure of a Call

There are two ways to analyze the cause of failure of a call in the signaling analysis interface:

Right click in the call information list, and select [Fail Reason Analysis] in the pop up shortcut menu.

Click the button in the toolbar.

Enter the following parameters in the pop up dialog box:

Select the cause of failure. It is different by signaling and protocols. The parameter must be specified.

Specify the callee number or caller ID. For SIP, H.323, MTP3, and PRA signaling, the caller ID is caller number; for H.248 signaling, the caller ID is termination ID; for MGCP signaling, the caller ID is endpoint ID. If you leave it blank, all calls will be analyzed.

For MTP3 and M3UA signaling, you can select protocol type (ISUP or TUP), call direction (incoming, outgoing, or both directions), and caller/callee attributes (caller side, called side, or any side).

After defining parameters, click <OK>, and the analysis results will be displayed in the signaling message and metrics analysis list as shown in Figure 5-107. The cause of failure statistics is displayed.

Page 251: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-109

Figure 5-107 Statistical results of cause of failures

In Figure 5-107, double click an analysis result, and a list of signaling messages related to all calls will be displayed in the “Stats Related Messages”, similar to those shown in Figure 5-105.

VII. Analyzing Call Completion Rate

There are two ways to analyze the cause of failure of a call in the signaling analysis interface:

Right click in the call information list, and select [Success Rate Analysis] in the pop up shortcut menu.

Click the button in the toolbar.

Enter the following parameters in the pop up dialog box:

Select the caller number or callee number as analysis object. For MGCP and H.248 signaling, only the callee number is available.

Enter the caller or callee number. For MGCP and H.248 signaling, only the callee number is available. When you leave it blank, all calls will be analyzed.

For MTP3 and M3UA signaling, you can select protocol type (ISUP or TUP), call direction (incoming, outgoing, or both directions), and caller/callee attributes (caller side, called side, or any side).

After defining parameters, click <OK>, and the analysis results will be displayed in the signaling message and metrics analysis list as shown in Figure 5-108. The call completion rate statistics is displayed.

Figure 5-108 Statistical results of call completion rate

Page 252: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-110

In Figure 5-108, double click an analysis result, and a list of signaling messages related to all calls will be displayed in the “Stats Related Messages”, similar to those shown in Figure 5-105.

VIII. Analyzing Calls of Early Releases and No Answers

There are two ways to measure and analyze the calls of early releases and no answers in the signaling analysis interface:

Right click in the call information list, and select [Premature Release and No Response Analysis] in the pop up shortcut menu.

Click the button in the toolbar.

Enter the callee number in the pop up dialog box. If you leave it blank, all calls will be analyzed. For MTP3 and M3UA signaling, you can select the call direction from Incoming, Outgoing, and Both Directions.

After defining parameters, click <OK>, and the analysis results will be displayed in the signaling message and metrics analysis list as shown in Figure 5-109. The statistical results of calls of early releases and no answers are displayed.

Figure 5-109 Statistical results of calls of early releases and no answers

In Figure 5-109, double click an analysis result, and a list of signaling messages related to all calls will be displayed in the “Stats Related Messages”, similar to those shown in Figure 5-105.

IX. Analyzing Extremely Short Bills and Call Durations

There are two ways to analyze the extremely short bills and call durations in the signaling analysis interface:

Right click in the call information list, and select [Short Bill Analysis] or [Call Time Analysis] in the pop up shortcut menu.

Click the button in the toolbar.

Enter the duration range of the bill to be analyzed in the pop up dialog box. The start duration ranges from 0 to 10 milliseconds, and the end duration ranges from 10 to 10000 milliseconds. For MTP3 and M3UA signaling, there is no limitation of input value range. For MTP3 and M3UA signaling, you can select the call direction from incoming, outgoing, and both directions.

Page 253: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-111

After defining parameters, click <OK>, and the analysis results will be displayed in the signaling message and metrics analysis list as shown in Figure 5-110. The statistical results of extremely short bills are displayed. For MTP3 and M3UA signaling, the results are different. For example, the call duration is displayed in Tick value.

Figure 5-110 Analysis results of extremely short bills

In Figure 5-110, double click an analysis result, and a list of signaling messages related to the call of extremely short bill will be displayed in the “Stats Related Messages”, similar to those shown in Figure 5-105.

X. Collecting Message Statistics

There are two ways to collect the statistics of all signaling messages in the signaling analysis interface:

Right click in the call information list, and select [Message Statistics] in the pop up shortcut menu.

Click the button in the toolbar.

After defining parameters, click <OK>, and the statistics will be displayed in the signaling message and metrics analysis list as shown in Figure 5-111 (using H.323 signaling statistics as an example). The displayed statistics includes incoming count, incoming percentage, outgoing count, and outgoing percentage.

Figure 5-111 Collecting message statistics

Page 254: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 5 Trace and Maintenance

5-112

XI. Saving and Searching Analysis Results

In the signaling message and metrics analysis list, you can right click and select the menu items in the pop up shortcut menu:

Select [Save As/Text File...] to save the information to a text file. Select [Save As/Text File...] to save the information to an excel file. Select [Find…] to search throughout the list. The search content is

case-sensitive. You can click <Find First> and <Find Next> to locate the search item.

XII. Closing Analysis Results

Right click in the result output page, and select [Close] in the pop up dialog box. The output page is then closed.

Page 255: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-1

Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6.1 Using BAM Application Software

6.1.1 Understanding Meanings of Service Processes

BAM application software includes processes such as Warn, Dataman, and Bill. Meanings of various processes are listed as follows:Warn: It is the alarm process. It processes the device alarm information and internal alarm information of the BAM. It provides functions of alarm report and alarm information query for workstation. It drives the alarm box.

Dataman: It is the data configuration process. It processes device configuration data and backs up data such as call prefix data and device data.

Bill: It is the billing process. It collects and sorts IP Centrex bills. Maintain: It is the maintenance process. It processes device maintenance

commands such as loading patches for device programs and signaling tracing. Statis: It is the performance measurement process. It processes performance

measurement data such as creating performance measurement tasks and result query.

MML: It implements the communication between the BAM and workstation, operator authority management, explanation of command entered through workstation, and distribution of command entered by workstation. In addition, the MML process bridges the communication between various processes of the BAM and the client. It is responsible for the execution of timer command.

Exchange: It is the communication module between the BAM and other devices. It loads device programs and data. It distributes messages returned by devices. It bridges the data exchange between the BAM and the host.

BillSorter: It sorts and manages bills. Its function has been shifted to the iGWB. SNTPClient: It is the SNTP client. It collects server time and synchronizes the time

of the BAM with that of the client. FTP Man:FTP 管理进程,BAM 充当 FTP 客户端,该进程用于对 BAM 与其他 FTP

服务器之间的文件上传、下载等交互操作进行管理。 XSMan:监听进程,仅用于管理警用监听接口,仅当该进程开启时,BAM 才可以

与监听中心进行数据交互。

6.1.2 Starting BAM Application Software

The U-SYS SoftX3000 Server is automatically started when the BAM is started. The startup window of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server is as shown in Figure 6-1.

Page 256: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-2

Figure 6-1 Startup window of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server

I. Introducing Interface Units of U-SYS SoftX3000 Server

The BAM application software includes processes such as Warn, Dataman, and Bill. The startup window of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server includes the following four columns: [Service], [Status], [Startup], and [ImagePath].Table 6-1details meanings of the four columns.

Table 6-1 Interface units of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server

Names Meanings Remarks

Service Name of process NA

Status Status of process

Started: The process is running. Stopped: The process is stopped. Exception: The process is abnormal. For example, the process is suspended.

Startup Startup type of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server

Automatic: After detecting that the process is stopped, the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server automatically restarts the process. Manual: After detecting that the process is stopped, the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server does not restart the process automatically. You have to restart it manually.System: The process is managed by the system. Disabled: The process is invalid or cancelled.

ImagePath Path of execution file corresponding to process NA

Page 257: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-3

II. Introducing Shortcut Icons on Startup Window of U-SYS SoftX3000 Server

Shortcut icons on the startup window of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server provide a series of functions. Table 6-2 describes functions of the shortcut icons.

Table 6-2 Functions of shortcut icons on the startup window of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server

Shortcut icons Functions Remarks

To exit the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server NA

To start a process

To stop a process

Before using the two icons, you need to select a process in the list. According to the status of the process (running or stopped), one of the two icons is activated. If the

selected process is running, is unavailable. If the

selected process is stopped, is unavailable.

To stop all processes NA

To display the interface of specified process

To hide the interface of specified process

The two icons provide a convenient method to open or close an application program interface. However, this method is effective only during the running of application programs. When application programs are restarted, the registration status of each program is read from the registry. If the registered status of the application program in the registry is not to display the interface of the application program, the interface of the application program will not be displayed after the program is restarted.

To configure the Startup type of each process

To set the Startup type of each process

To start or stop the real-time monitoring function

To start or stop the real-time monitoring of process

About U-SYS SoftX3000 Server

To display information such as version of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server.

Caution:

Shutting down the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server will interrupt the communication between the BAM and the SoftX3000. It will also interrupt the communication between the BAM, and all maintenance WSs and the host.

Page 258: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-4

6.1.3 Using Service Management Process

You can use the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server to monitor and manage multiple processes running on the BAM. The U-SYS SoftX3000 Server manages processes by the following three modes:

Starting a specified process. Stopping a specified process. Stop all processes.

I. Starting a Specified Process

You can start a specified process according to the following steps:

1) Select the process to be started on the startup window of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server.

2) Click [File/Start] or on the toolbar to start the selected process.

II. Stopping a Specified Process

You can stop a specified process according to the following steps:

1) Select the process to be stopped on the startup window of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server.

2) Click [File/Stop] or on the toolbar. A dialog box pops up prompting whether

you are sure to stop the process. 3) Click <Yes> to stop the process.

Note:

According to the status of the process, or is activated. If the selected process is running,

is unavailable. If the selected process is stopped, is unavailable.

III. Stopping All Processes

Click [File/Stop All] or on the toolbar and you can stop all processes.

Using Real-time Monitoring Function

The real-time monitoring function monitors all processes whose startup types are Automatic or System. If the processes are stopped because of different reasons, they are automatically restarted. The status of each process is updated under the Status

Page 259: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-5

column of the startup window of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server. If the real-time monitoring function is not activated, restart the function manually.

Click [Options/Realtime Monitor] or on the toolbar and you can start or stop the

real-time monitoring function.

6.1.4 Configuring Server Startup Information

Through configuring the startup information, you can set the startup type of the BAM when the computer is restarted. There are four startup types of the BAM:

Automatic Manual Disabled System

Proceed as follows to set the startup type of the BAM:

1) Click [Options/Startup] or on the toolbar and a dialog box pops up, as shown

in Figure 6-2.

Figure 6-2 Configuring startup information

Table 6-3 lists the meanings of the four startup types.

Table 6-3 Startup types and meanings of the BAM Service.

Startup types Meanings

Automatic When a BAM Service is detected to be stopped, the system automatically restarts the BAM Service.

Manual The BAM Service needs to be manually restarted.

Disable The system forbids automatic start of the BAM Service.

System The process is managed by the system.

Page 260: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-6

2) After selecting the type, click <OK>.

Note:

In normal cases, set the startup type to Automatic.

6.2 Using BAM Server Gateway Tool The BAM server gateway tool is an attached software of the BAM. It can only be used on the BAM for connecting serial port device with the BAM.

The tool is an expansion of the communication layer of the BAM. It converts message between TCP/IP and serial port protocol. It establishes connection with the BAM through TCP/IP. It establishes connection with other serial port devices through serial port protocol. It transparently transfers data between the BAM and serial port device. For the BAM, command from any serial port device is considered as coming from an IP address. All data sent by the BAM go to an IP address no matter the data might finally stay on a serial port device such as HyperTerminal and alarm box.

The relationship between each serial port protocol and TCP/IP set up by the BAM server gateway tool is called a connection. The tool supports multiple connection cases. Each connection case is monitored by a conversion thread. You can set up or close a connection case at any time.

6.2.1 Starting BAM Server Gateway Tool

Click [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Server Gateway Tool] on the BAM. Figure 6-3 shows the main window.

Figure 6-3 Startup window of the BAM server gateway tool

If some connections are established during the last run of the system, the system automatically records the connection configuration information to the file registry (Path:

Page 261: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-7

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ huawei\SoftX3000\convert). If automatic reconnection is enabled for some connections, the system, during system restart, automatically creates connections according to information saved in the file registry. The connections are configured according to the information saved after the successful creation last time. The automatic reconnection window is as shown in Figure 6-4.

Figure 6-4 Successful reconnection window of the BAM server gateway tool

6.2.2 Creating Connection

I. Cautions in Creating Connection

During the use of the gateway tool, you might need to use some hardware devices. The configuration of the hardware devices must be correct.The IP address of the BAM must be correct. Otherwise, the system cannot check itself but attempts to reconnect repeatedly.Pay attention to the use of compressed mode. Decompression and compression operations need to be completed.Check whether the alarm console of the BAM is running normally when using the alarm box.If you starts two gateway tool program cases, the latter case pops up. That is, the system only reserves one case.Operation Procedure

You can create a connection according to the following steps:

1) Click [Operation/Create connection] or on the toolbar and a dialog box pops

up, as shown in Figure 6-5.

Page 262: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-8

Figure 6-5 “Create a new connection” dialog box for configuring connection information of the BAM server gateway tool

Meanings of the fields are as follows:Serial port: to select the serial port number used by the current conversion.

BAM IP address: to select the address of the BAM to be connected. If the gateway tool runs on the BAM, the address can be replaced by 127.0.0.1.

Client application type: to select type of serial port device. For example, GUI maintenance class and alarm box class.

Serial port configuration: to configure serial port. By default, the baud rate is 9600 bit/s, the data bit is 8, the parity is None, and the stop bit is 1.

Compress: to set whether to use the compressed mode for information transmission. By default, it is not to use the compressed mode.

Auto reconnect: It means whether to automatically reconnect the existing connections after the gateway tool is restarted.

Select “Use modem dial by hand” if modem is needed for connection. Enter telephone number in “Modem configuration”.

2) After setting the data of the above fields according to your requirement, click <Create> and the system creates a conversion connection according to your setting.

If you cannot create a connection, it might be due to one or several of the following reasons:The selected serial port does not exist.

The serial port configuration information is wrong. The selected BAM IP address is wrong.

Page 263: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-9

The BAM IP address is correct, but the BAM is not properly started. The selected serial port has been used.

6.2.3 Interrupting Connection

You can interrupt a connection according to the following steps:

1) Click [Operation/Interrupt connection] and a dialog box as shown in Figure 6-6 pops up.

Figure 6-6 “Disconnect” dialog box

2) Select the serial port corresponding to the connection to be interrupted. Click <OK> to confirm the disconnection.

6.3 Using Workstation Gateway Tool The workstation gateway tool is an attached software of the U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center. It is an expansion of the communication layer of the workstation. It converts message between TCP/IP and serial port protocol. It establishes connection with the workstation through TCP/IP. It establishes connection with other serial port device through serial port protocol. It transparently transfers data between the workstation and serial port device. For the workstation, command from any serial port device is considered as coming from an IP address. All data sent by the workstation go to an IP address no matter the data might stay on a serial port device such as HyperTerminal and alarm box.

The relationship between each serial port protocol and TCP/IP set up by the workstation gateway tool is called a connection. The tool supports multiple connection cases. Each connection case is monitored by a conversion thread. Each connection case can be set up and closed at any time.

The workstation gateway tool is used for connecting workstation with serial port devices. It can be run on the BAM or the LAN where the BAM is located. It can even be run on any computer which communicates with the BAM through TCP/IP on the WAN. The serial port of the computer is used to provide services for client workstation.

Page 264: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-10

6.3.1 Starting Workstation Gateway Tool

Click [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 workstation Gateway Tool] on the BAM or workstation and you can start the workstation gateway tool as shown in Figure 6-7.

Figure 6-7 Startup window of the workstation gateway tool

If some connections are established during the last run of the system, the system automatically records the connection configuration information to the file registry (Path: HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\ huawei\SoftX3000\convert). If automatic reconnection is enabled for some connections, the system, during system restart, automatically creates connections according to information saved in the file registry. The connections are configured according to the information saved after the successful creation last time. The automatic reconnection window is as shown in Figure 6-8.

Figure 6-8 Successful reconnection window of the workstation gateway tool

6.3.2 Creating Connection

I. Cautions in Creating Connection

During the usage of the gateway tool, you might need to use some hardware devices. The configuration of the hardware devices must be correct:The BAM IP address must be correct. Otherwise, the system cannot check but reconnects continuously.The alarm box can only be connected to the BAM or the emergency workstation. Do not connect it to a common workstation.Check whether the alarm console of the BAM is running

Page 265: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-11

normally when using the alarm box.If you starts two gateway tool program cases, the latter case pops up. That is, the system only reserves one case.Operation Procedure

You can create a connection according to the following steps:

1) Click [Connection/Create] or on the toolbar and a dialog box pops up, as

shown in Figure 6-9.

Figure 6-9 Dialog box for configuring connection information

Meanings of the fields are as follows:Serial port: The serial port number used by the current conversion.

BAM IP address: The address of the BAM to be connected. If the gateway tool runs on the BAM, the address can be replaced by 127.0.0.1.

Connection type: The type of serial port device. For example, GUI maintenance class and alarm box class.

Suggest listen port: to set the monitoring port number. Serial port configuration: Serial port configuration. By default, the baud rate is

19,200 bit/s, the data bit is 8, the parity is None, and the stop bit is 1. Select “Use modem dial by hand” if modem is needed for connection. Enter

corresponding contents in “Dial command”. 2) After setting the data of the above fields according to your requirement, click <Ok>

and the system creates a conversion connection according to your setting.

If you cannot create a connection, it might be due to one or several of the following reasons:The selected serial port does not exist.

The serial port configuration information is wrong.

Page 266: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-12

The selected BAM IP address is wrong. The BAM IP address is correct, but the BAM is not properly started. The selected serial port has been used.

6.3.3 Interrupting Connection

You can interrupt a connection according to the following steps:

1) Click [Connection/Close] and a dialog box as shown in Figure 6-10 pops up

Figure 6-10 “Disconnect” dialog box

2) Select the serial port corresponding to the connection to be interrupted. Click <OK> to confirm the disconnection.

6.4 Using BAM Service The BAM Service monitors whether the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server is started. If the BAM Service runs normally and it detects that the U-SYS SoftX3000 Server is stopped, the BAM Service automatically restarts the BAM. The function of the BAM Service is similar to that of the Software Watchdog.

You can control the function of the BAM Service manually during the debugging process of the system. The detailed operation steps are as follows:

1) Click [Start/Programs/Administrative Tools/Services] on the BAM and a window as shown in Figure 6-11 pops up.

Page 267: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-13

Figure 6-11 “Services” window

2) Right-click [BAM Service]. Select [Properties] on the pop-up shortcut menu and an interface as shown in Figure 6-12 pops up.

Page 268: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-14

Figure 6-12 “BAM Service Properties” interface

Meanings of three startup types are listed in Table 6-4.

Table 6-4 Startup types and meanings of the BAM Service.

Startup types Meanings

Automatic When a BAM Service is detected to be stopped, the system automatically restarts the BAM Service.

Manual The BAM Service needs to be manually started.

Disabled The system forbids automatic start of the BAM Service.

Note:

Under normal cases, the startup type is set to Automatic.

Page 269: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-15

6.5 Using Smirror Process The Smirror processes exist on the BAM and the emergency workstation. The emergency workstation backs up the BAM data using the Smirror process. The emergency workstation backs up the BAM data every four hours only if the Smirror processes on the BAM and the emergency workstation are started.

You can back up the BAM data on the emergency workstation according to the following steps:

1) Click [Start/Programs/Administrative Tools/Services] on the BAM and the emergency workstation respectively. A window as shown in Figure 6-13 pops up.

Figure 6-13 “Services” window

2) Right-click [Smirror] and select [Start] on the pop-up shortcut menu.

Note:

Normally, the Smirror process is automatically started. If it is not started, start it manually. If the synchronous backup information between the emergency workstation and the BAM is set during the installation of the emergency workstation, it is unnecessary to set the configuration file. If the synchronous backup information is not set or set incorrectly, set the configuration file according to the following method.

Page 270: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-16

3) Open the STXBAM.ini file under the D:\SoftX3000 directory of the emergency workstation, as shown in Figure 6-14.

Figure 6-14 Initialization window of the emergency workstation

4) Configure the initialization data under [Mirror].

There are four groups of parameters numbered 0, 1, 2, and 3 under [Mirror], indicating that four groups of data backup information can be configured between the BAM and the workstation. Meanings of parameters are as follows:

RemoteServer: It refers to the IP address of the BAM to be connected with the emergency workstation.

RemoteDir: It refers to the storage path of the BAM data files. LocalDir: It refers to the storage path of the backup BAM data on the emergency

workstation.

The emergency workstation backs up the BAM data once every four hours. Only files whose are modified more than four hours ago are backed up.

6.6 Using Automatic Login Tool The automatic login tool sets the automatic login information of the Windows 2000 Server. The detailed operation steps are as follows:

1) Select [Start/Programs/U-SYS SoftX3000 Operation and Maintenance Center/U-SYS SoftX3000 Autologin Tool] on the Windows 2000 Server and a “SoftX3000 option setting” dialog box is displayed as shown in Figure 6-15.

Page 271: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

tion Manual–GUI Guide S SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System Chapter 6 Using GUI on BAM

6-17

Figure 6-15 “SoftX3000 Option Setting” dialog box

2) Enter the field name in "Domain". In this case, it is the computer name of the BAM, SX3KBAM. Enter the login account name (Administrator) of the system administrator in “User”. Enter the login password of the system administrator in “Password”. For example, the default password is “admin”.

Caution:

The account name and password must be the same as those set for the administrator during the installation of the Windows 2000 Server. Otherwise, the automatic login cannot be enabled.

3) Select “Enable automatic login” and click <OK> to complete the setting.

Restart the server after you finish the setting to validate the setting.

Page 272: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-1

AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A.1 Using TableBrowse TableBrowse is a tool that helps you query BAM data on client. You can query the BAM data without having to install it by using the TableBrowse.

A.1.1 Classifying Data on BAM

The data in the BAM Database are classified into 10 data sets, each of which contains the data tables of a certain type. You can query the data more quickly if you know which group contains the data you wanted before querying. The definition of each data group is as follows:

BC: Bearer Control. It stores media gateway configuration data, such as MGCP and H248 protocol.

BTS: Bearer Trunk Signaling. It stores the trunk data related to SS7. CC: Call Control. It stores call control data, such as number analysis data. DB: Datebase. It stores data related to the host, such as route data and network

management (NM) data. H323&SIP: It stores the data related to H323 or SIP terminal configuration. SERVICE: It stores the data related to service, such as IPN, NP and UC. SS: System Support. It stores the data related to hardware, such as board

switching. TP: Terminal processing. It stores the operator data. OMC Information: Operation and Maintenance Center. It stores the global data of

the system, such as maximum number of tuples. FN: Fixed Network. It stores the data related to operator alarms and private

network traversal.

A.1.2 Starting TableBrowse

To start TableBrowse on a client, proceed as follows:

1) Double click TableBrowse.exe under D:\SoftX3000\Tools\TableBrowser on the client. The SQL Server Login interface is displayed as shown in Figure A-1

Page 273: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-2

Figure A-1 [SQL Server Login] dialog box

The definition of each parameter is as follows:

Server: Enter the IP address of the BAM you want to connect with in the box. If TableBrowse runs on the BAM, you can enter 127.0.0.1.

Login in ID: Enter the administrator name of the SQL Server database. Password: Enter the administrator password.

2) Click <OK> after entering the IP address, name and password on the interface shown in Figure A-1. An interface of data table query is displayed, as shown in Figure A-2.

Figure A-2 Interface of data table query

If connecting successfully, the status bar in the Figure A-2 shows “Connected”.

Page 274: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-3

A.1.3 Using File Menus

I. Reconnecting BAM Database

After logging in to the TableBrowse successfully, you can connect reconnection or the database on another BAM. The operations are as follows:

1) After starting TableBrowse, select [File/ Connect] in the menu bar on the default

login interface of the TableBrowse, or press shortcut keys <Ctrl+R>, or click

in the toolbar. The SQL Server Login interface is displayed, as shown inFigure A-1 2) Enter the address, user name and password of the BAM as shown in Figure A-1

Click <OK>, and the interface of the TableBrowse is displayed.

II. Logging out Connection

To log out of the TableBrowse, select [File/Exit] in the menu bar of the login interface of the TableBrowse, or press shortcut keys <Ctrl+X>.

A.1.4 Using Tools Menus

The Tools menu is frequently used. The following part takes the query of Call Prefix as an example to show how to use the tools menu.

I. Setting Query Condition

You can query the Call Prefix whose value is larger, smaller or equal to a certain Call Prefix data as you required. The required Call Prefix field is in the Called NO Analysis table of the CC group. The operations are as follows:

1) Double click <Called NO Analysis table> under <CC> in the navigation tree window. A data table is displayed on the right of the interface, as shown in Figure A-3

Page 275: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-4

Figure A-3 Result of data query

2) Select [Tools / Find] or press shortcut keys <Ctrl+F> or press on the toolbar,

to display a finding window, as shown in Figure A-4.

Figure A-4 “Finding” window (1)

The text box under “Field” shows all fields in the Called NO Analysis table. The operator list contains 6 operators: “=”, “>”,”<”,”>=”,”<=”, and”<>”.

Page 276: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-5

If behind the operator is an enumerated value, you can choose the value in the pull-down list of the “Value” text box. If behind the operator is a number, you can enter the number in the “value” text box by hand.

The bottons <+> and <–> to the right of “Value” is to add or delete a condition in the “Condition” field.

3) Click <+> to add the finding condition you set in the “Condition” field. The result is as shown in Figure A-5.

Figure A-5 “Finding” window (2)

4) Click <Start> to start finding. The result is displayed to the right of the navigation tree window, as shown in Figure A-6.

Page 277: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-6

Figure A-6 Query results

II. Refreshing Result

You can press F5 or select [Tools / Refresh] to refresh the query result.

III. Setting Record Number of Query Result

You can set the number of displayed query result as you required. The operations are as follows:

1) Select [Tools / Env Conifg] or press F6 or press on the toolbar, to display a

“Environment configuration” window, as shown in Figure A-7.

Figure A-7 “Environment configuration” window

Page 278: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-7

2) Set the number of query result displayed, and then click <OK>.

Note:

The default number of maximum displayed query results is 1000. You can modify it as you required, but the new number must be an integer between 10 and 2000.

A.1.5 Using View Menus

I. Showing and Hiding Navigation Tree

You can use one of the following ways to show or hide the navigation tree as you required.

Select [View / Navigator View] or press F2 or press on the toolbar, to show or hide

the navigation tree.

II. Showing and Hiding Toolbar

The toolbar offers you the operation buttons to operate conveniently. You can use one of the following ways to show or hide the toolbar.

Select [View / Toolbar] to display or hide the navigation tree window.

III. Showing and Hiding Status Bar

The status bar shows the status of the BAM for you. You can use one of the following ways to show or hide the status bar.

Select [View / Toolbar] to display or hide the navigation tree window.

A.1.6 Using Window Menus

If you want to display multiple windows, you can cascading them, tile them horizontally or vertically. The operation is the same as using Windows system, we just provides you the example of cascading windows.

Select [Window / Cascade Windows] or click to cascade windows, as shown in

Figure A-8.

Page 279: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-8

Figure A-8 “Cascade” window

A.1.7 Using Shortcut menus

In query, you can use shortcut menus to set query condition or refresh results. The operations are as follows:

1) Click the right key in the result window. A shortcut menu is displayed in the window, as shown in Figure A-9.

Page 280: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-9

Figure A-9 Shortcut menu

2) Click [Find] on the shortcut menu. A “Finding” window is displayed as shown in Figure A-5 for you to set query condition to go on finding.

3) Click [Refresh] on the shortcut menu to refresh the result in the window.

A.1.8 Displaying Version

You can use the following way to query the version information of the TableBrowse.

Select [Help / About TableBrowser] or click on the toolbar. An “About

TableBrowser” interface is displayed as shown in Figure A-10.

Figure A-10 Version information

Page 281: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-10

A.1.9 Using Toolbar

The toolbar contains icons of frequently used operation. These icons provide the same functions as some of the menus. Table A-1 lists the functions of the icons.

Table A-1 Functions of icons in the toolbar

Icon Functions

Show / hide the navigation tree.

Reconnection

Query by conditions

Set the number of displayed results

Cascade windows

Tile windows horizontally

Tile windows vertically

Close all windows

Query version

A.1.10 Using Shortcut Keys

The TableBrowse software has some shortcut keys to help you use the TableBrowse efficiently. Table A-2 lists the functions of the shortcut keys.

Table A-2 Functions of shortcut keys

Shortcut keys Functions

F2 Show / hide the navigation tree.

F3 Go forward for one record

F4 Go back for seven records

F5 Refresh the window

F6 Set the number of query results

Page 282: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-11

A.2 Using ExTableBrowse ExTableBrowse is a tool which helps you query the data configured in the host without having to install the database. However, you cannot modify the host data.

A.2.1 Classifying Data on Host

The data in the host are classified into seven data groups, each of which contains data tables of a certain module. You can query the data more quickly if you know which group contains the data you wanted before querying. The definition of the data groups is as follows:

SYS stores the data on the SMUI. FSPC stores the data on the FCCU and the FCSU. CDB stores the data on the CDBI, such as call location, gateway resource

management and outgoing trunk selection. BSG stores the data on the BSGI. BSGI is used to process the IP packets after the

IFMI level-1 dispatch. It processes such protocols as UDP, SCTP, M2UA, M3UA, V5UA, IUA, MGCP and H.248 and performs level-2 dispatch of such messages to the FCCU or FCSU for transaction layer or service layer processing.

MRC stores the data on the MRCA which is related to collecting and generating DTMF signals, playing and recording audio clips and holding multiparty conferences.

MSG stores the data on the MSGI, which is related to UDP, TCP, H.323 (H.323 RAS, H.323 CALL Signaling) and SIP.

IFM stores the data used to forward IP packets, and the data related to processing the message of the media access control (MAC) and distributing the IP packets.

A.2.2 Using ExTableBrowse

The operations of using the ExTableBrowse are the same as those of TableBrowse. Refer to A.1 Using TableBrowse for further reference.

The following part shows how to use the ExTableBrwose to query data on the host.

1) Double click <ExTableBrowse. exe> under [D:\SoftX3000\Tools\ExTableBrowser] on the client. The SQL Server Login interface is displayed as shown in Figure A-11.

Page 283: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-12

Figure A-11 Interface of SQL Server Login

The definition of each parameter is as follows:

Server IP Address: The IP address of the BAM:Enter the IP address of the BAM you want to connect with.If the ExTableBrowse runs on the BAM, you can enter 127.0.0.1.

SQL Server User:Enter the administrator name of the SQL Server database. SQL Server Password:Enter the administrator password.

2) Click <OK> after entering the IP address, name and password on the interface shown in Figure A-11. An interface of choosing board module is displayed, as shown in Figure A-12.

Figure A-12 “Download system table” window

The definition of each parameter is as follows:

Module Number: Choose the number of the module. Module Type: Enter the type of the module to identify the board. It must be

corresponding to the number chosen in the module number box. Card Type: Choose primary or backup as the type of the board.

Page 284: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-13

3) Click <OK> after entering the module number and board type to download data from the host. The result is as shown in Figure A-12.

Figure A-13 Download board module data

After the data is downloaded, a database named DumpedEX is created in the SQL Server database on the BAM to store system tables.

4) After downloading the data of the designated module, double click the module number in the navigation tree on the left of the interface as shown in Figure A-13. The result is as shown in Figure A-14

Page 285: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixA Using Data Table Query Tools

A-14

Figure A-14 “Query data of designated module” window

A.2.3 Using Toolbar

The toolbar contains icons of frequently used operation. These icons provide the same functions as some of the menusTable A-3 lists the functions of the icons.

Table A-3 Functions of icons in the toolbar

Icon Functions

Show/hide the navigation tree.

Reconnection

Query by conditions

Set the number of displayed results

Cascade windows

Tile windows horizontally

Tile windows vertically

Close all windows

Query version

Page 286: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixB Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-1

AppendixB Acronyms and Abbreviations

Abbreviation Description

A

AAA Authentication Authorization and Accounting

ACC Account Card Calling

AMG Access Media Gateway

AN Access Network

ASN.1 Abstract Syntax Notation One

B

BAM Back Administration Module

BFII Back insert FE Interface Unit

BITS Building Integrated Timing Supply

BRA Basic Rate Access

BSGI Broadband Signaling Gateway

C

CAMA Centralized Automatic Message Accounting

CCF Call Control Function

CDBI Central Database Board

CDR Call Detail Record

Centrex Central Office Exchange Service

CIC Circuit Identification Code

CID Caller Identification Display

CKII Clock Interface Unit

CODEC Coder-decoder

CPC Central Processing Board

D

DDI Direct-Dialing-In

DOD2 Direct Outward Dialing-2

DPC Destination Point Code

DSS1 Digital Subscriber Signaling No.1

DTMF Dual-Tone Multifrequency

Page 287: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixB Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-2

Abbreviation Description

E

EC Echo Canceller

ENUM E.164 Number URI Mapping

EPII E1_Pool Interface Unit

F

FCCU Fixed Calling Control Unit

FCSU Fixed Calling Control Unit and Signaling process Unit

FE Fast Ethernet

FPH Free Phone

FSK Frequency Shift Keying

G

GK Gatekeeper

GT Global Title

GW GateWay

I

IAD Integrated Access Device

iDo ViewPoint iDo

IFMI IP Forward Module

iGWB iGateWay Bill

IN Intelligent Network

INAP Intelligent Network Application Protocol

IP Internet Protocol

IPN Internet Personal Number

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network

ISUP ISDN User Part

ITU-T International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication Standardization Sector

IUA ISDN Q.921-User Adaptation Layer

IVR Interactive Voice Response

M

M2PA MTP2-User Peer-to-Peer Adaptation Layer

M2UA Message Transfer Part 2 (MTP2) -User Adaptation Layer

M3UA Message Transfer Part 3 (MTP3) -User Adaptation Layer

Page 288: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixB Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-3

Abbreviation Description

MAC Media Access Control

MCU Multipoint Control Unit

MG Media Gateway

MGC Media Gateway Controller

MGCP Media Gateway Control Protocol

MIDCOM Middlebox Communications

MML Man Machine Language

MRCA Media Resource Control Unit

MRIA Media Resource Interface Unit

MRS Media Resource Server

MSGI Multimedia Signaling Gateway Unit

MTA Media Terminal Adapter

MTP Message Transfer Part

N

NAT Network Address Translation

NCS Network-Based Call Signaling

NGN Next Generation Network

NMS Network management System

NP Number Portability

O

OAM Operation Administration and Maintenance

OPC Originating Point Code

P

PAP Password Authentication Protocol

PBX Private Branch Exchange

PDB Power Distribution Box

PPS Pre-Paid Service

PRA Primary Rate Access

POTS Plain Old Telephone Service

PPS Pre-Paid Service

PSTN Public Switched Telephone Network

R

RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service

Page 289: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixB Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-4

Abbreviation Description

RAS Registration, Admission and Status

RTCP Real-time Transport Control Protocol

RTP Real-time Transport Protocol

S

SAU Signaling Access Unit

SCCP Signaling Connection Control Part

SCN Switched Circuit Network

SCP Service Control Point

SCTP Stream Control Transmission Protocol

SDH Synchronous Digital Hierarchy

SDP Service Data Point

SG Signaling Gateway

SIGTRAN Signaling Transport

SIP Session Initiation Protocol

SIUI System Interface Unit

SLC Signaling Link Code

SLS Signaling Link Selection Code

SMAP Service Management Access Point

SMP Service Management Point

SMS Service Management System

SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol

SP Signaling Point

SS7 Signaling System No.7

SSN Sub-System Number

SSP Service Switching Point

STP Signaling Transfer Point

STUN Simple Traversal of UDP Through Network Address Translators

T

TCAP Transaction Capabilities Application Part

TCP Transport Control Protocol

TDM Time Division Mulitiplex(ing)

TMG Trunk Media Gateway

TRIP Telephone Route Information Protocol

Page 290: 1.1 Composition of GUI 1-1read.pudn.com/downloads181/ebook/846323/softx3000... · 2009-07-10 · Chapter 3 Using Alarm Management System ..... 3-1 3.1 Overview of Alarm Management

Operation Manual–GUI Guide U-SYS SoftX3000 SoftSwitch System AppendixB Acronyms and Abbreviations

B-5

Abbreviation Description

U

UDP User Datagram Protocol

UMG Universal Media Gateway

UNI User Network Interface

U-NICA Universal Network Intelligent Core Architecture

UPT Universal Personal Telecommunication

U-SYS You Design Your System

V

V5UA V5.2-User Adaptation Layer

VoIP Voice Over IP

VOT Televoting

VPN Virtual Private Network

URL Uniform Resource Locators

W

WAC Wide Area Centrex

WWW World Wide Web

X

xDSL x Digital Subscriber Line

XML Extensible Markup Language